SPECIFICATIONS FOR AIRFIELD MAINTENANCE … MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS SUPPORT FACILITY MEMPHIS...

SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

AIRFIELD MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS SUPPORT FACILITY

MEMPHIS INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT MEMPHIS, TENNESSEE

MSCAA PROJECT NO. 14-1386-02

DATED: 1/10/18

VOLUME 2 OF 3

ISSUED FOR BID

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

ISSUED FOR BID 03 30 10

Page 1

SECTION 03 30 10

CONCRETE WORK

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 EXTENT OF THE WORK

A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except

where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:

1. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings

2. ACI 302, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Placement

3. ACI 304, Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and

Placing Concrete

4. ACI 305, Hot Weather Concreting

5. ACI 306, Cold Weather Concreting

6. ACI 308, Standard Practice for Curing Concrete

7. ACI 315, Detailing Manual

8. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

9. ACI 347, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork

10. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice

11. AASHTO TP 23, Standard Method of Test for Water Content of Freshly Mixed

Concrete Using Microwave Oven Drying

B. The Contractor is responsible for correcting concrete work that does not conform to the

specified requirements, including requirements for strength, tolerances, and finishes. Correct

deficient concrete as directed by the A/E.

C. Employ at the Contractor's expense a testing laboratory acceptable to the A/E to perform

material evaluation tests and to design and review concrete mixes.

D. Testing Agency Qualification: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as

documented according to ASTM E 548.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade I, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength

Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician – Grade I. Testing

Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing

Technician- Grade II.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

03 30 10 ISSUED FOR BID

Page 2

E. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the A/E, at any

time during the progress of the work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at

all times. Tests not specifically indicated to be done at the Owner's expense, including the

retesting of rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at the Contractor's expense.

F. Test aggregates by the methods of sampling and testing outlined in ASTM C33.

G. For Portland cement, sample the cement and determine the properties by the methods of

testing outlined in ASTM C150.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 01 30 00, Submittals.

B. For each material sampled and tested, submit written reports to the A/E prior to the start of

work. Provide the project identification name and number, date of report, name of Contractor,

name of concrete testing service, source of concrete aggregates, materials manufacturer and

brand name for manufactured materials, values specified in the referenced specification for

each material, and test results. Indicate whether or not material is acceptable for the intended

use.

C. Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for

proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures,

patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing and sealing compounds, and others

requested by the A/E.

D Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement.

Comply with the ACI 315, Detailing Manual, showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams

of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Show on the shop drawings special

reinforcement required and openings through concrete structures.

E. Submit mix design in accordance with ACI requirements. Provide for each mix design, the

project name, city, general contractor, concrete strength, and it’s intended use.

F. Submit 2 copies of laboratory test reports with standard deviation analysis or trial batch data.

All concrete materials shall be listed.

G. Submittals shall be approved by the Structural Engineer of Record prior to procurement or

fabrication of materials.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings,

construct formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed

plywood, or other panel type materials acceptable to the A/E in order to provide exposed

surfaces that are continuous, straight, and smooth. To minimize the number of joints and to

conform to the joint system shown on the Drawings, furnish panels in the largest practicable

sizes. Provide form material that is thick enough to withstand pressure of newly placed

concrete without bowing or deflection.

B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: For surfaces that will be unexposed in the finished

structure, form concrete with plywood, lumber, metal, or other material acceptable to the A/E.

If lumber is used, it shall be dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form coating compounds that will not bond

with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surface and that will not impair subsequent treatments

of concrete surfaces to be cured with water or curing compound.

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bar: ASTM A706. Alternately, reinforcing shall comply with ASTM 615 Grade 60

with the following requirements:

1. Actual yield strength based on mill tests does not exceed 78 ksi. Retests shall not

exceed this value by more than an additional 3000 psi.

2. Fu/Fy shall not be less than 1.25. (Fy – Actual yield tensile strength, Fu – actual

ultimate tensile strength.)

C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, welded steel wire fabric, in flat sheets only.

D. Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A497

E. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement, including bolsters, chairs,

spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded

wire fabric in place. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, use wire type bar supports

complying with CRSI recommendations. Wood, brick, and other devices will not be

acceptable. Comply with the following:

1. For slabs on grade, where wetted base material will not support chair legs, use

supports with sand plates or horizontal runners.

2. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where leg supports are in contact with forms,

provide supports with legs that are hot dip galvanized or protected by either plastic or

stainless steel.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 4

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project,

unless otherwise acceptable to the A/E.

B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33, and as specified below:

1. Fine aggregate is to be clean, sharp, river sand or crushed gravel when used for

vehicular wearing surfaces. Manufactured sand may be used elsewhere provided

the percentage passing a No. 200 sieve is less than 3 percent.

3. Pea gravel may not be used as concrete aggregate, unless requested for a specific

application by the contractor and approved for that application by the EOR.

C. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed limestone that is clean,

uncoated, and processed from natural rock or stone and that contains no clay, mud, loam, or

foreign matter. Its maximum size shall be no larger than 1/5 of the narrowest dimension

between sides of forms, 1/3 of the depth of slabs, or 3/4 of the minimum clear spacing

between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars.

Combined aggregate gradation for slabs and other designated concrete shall be 8% - 18% for

large top size aggregates (1-1/2”) or 8% - 22% for smaller top size aggregates (1” or 3/4")

retained on each sieve below the top size and above the No. 100.

D. Under Slab Vapor Barrier:

1. Vapor barrier shall have the minimum following properties:

a. Thickness: Not less than 15 mils.

b. Water Vapor Retarders: ASTM E-1745, meets or exceeds Class A or B.

c. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: ASTM E-96, 0.006 gr./ft2/hr or lower.

d. Permeance Rate: ASTM E-96, 0.01 gr./ft2/hr or lower.

e. Puncture Resistance: ASTM E-1745, minimum 1970 grams.

f. Tensile Strength: ASTM E-1745, minimum 45.0 lb. per inch.

2. Provide Stego Wrap (15 mil) Vapor Barrier by Stego Industries LLC, Moistop Ultra “A”

(15 Mil) by Fortifier Building Products Systems (1-800-773-4777) or approved

substitute.

3. Lap and tape all joints using minimum 4 inch wide high density polyethylene tape with

pressure sensitive adhesive. Repair any tears.

4. Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable

F. Admixtures

1. Water Reducing Admixture: Eucon WR-75, WR-91 or MR by the Euclid Chemical

Company, Pozzolith 220-N by Master Builders, or WRDA 15 by W.R. Grace. The

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 5

admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type A, and not contain more chloride ions

than are present in municipal drinking water.

2. Water Reducing, Retarding Admixture: Eucon Retarder-75 by the Euclid Chemical

Company or Pozzolith 100 XR by Master Builders. The admixture shall conform to

ASTM C494, Type D, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in

municipal drinking water.

3. Mid-range Water Reducing Admixture: Eucon MR or Plastol 341 by the Euclid

Chemical Company, Polyheed 997 by Master Builders or Daracem SD by W.R.

Grace. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494 Type A.

4. Nonchloride Accelerator: Accelguard 80, Accelguard 90 or NCA by the Euclid

Chemical Company or Darex Set Accelerator by W. R. Grace. The admixture shall

conform to ASTM C494, Type C or E, and not contain more chloride ions than are

present in municipal drinking water.

5. Air Entraining Admixture: AEA-92 by Euclid Chemical Corporation, MB AE-90 by

Master Builders, or Darex AEA by W.R. Grace. The admixture shall conform to

ASTM C260.

6. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing

more than 0.05 percent chloride ions are not permitted.

8. Certification: Written conformance to the aforementioned requirements and the

chloride ion content will be required from the admixture manufacturer prior to mix

design review by the A/E.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Base Material Beneath Floor Slabs: Base material shall be a granular material per the

recommendation of the Project Geotechnical Investigation Report.

B. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: sponge rubber, ASTM D1752, Type I

C. Contraction/Construction Joint Filler: The joint filler shall be a two (2) component 100% solids

compound, with a minimum shore A hardness of 80. Products: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide “Euco 700 or QWIK Joint” by the Euclid Chemical Company, “Sikadur

51 SL” by Sika Chemical Corporation, or MM-80 by Metzer/McGuire.

D. Moisture Retaining Covering: One of the following, complying with ASTM C171:

1. Waterproof paper

2. Polyethylene film

3. Polyethylene coated burlap

E. Curing and Sealing Compound: Kurez DR VOX or Kurez W VOX by the Euclid Chemical

Company, Master Kure 200W by Master Builders or Kure-n-Seal by Sonneborn. The

compound shall conform to FS TT-C-800A, 30 percent solids content minimum, and have test

data from an independent laboratory indicating a maximum moisture loss of 0.030 gram per

square centimeter when applied at a coverage rate of 300 square feet per gallon.

Manufacturer's certification is required.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 6

F. Bonding Compound: Euco Weld by Euclid Chemical Company or Weldcrete by the Larsen

Company. The compound shall be a polyvinyl acetate, rewettable type.

G. Epoxy Adhesive: Euco Epoxy No. 452 or No. 620 by Euclid Chemical Company, Sikadur

Hi-Mod by Sika Chemical Corporation, or Epcon Ceramic 6 by ITW Ramset. The compound

shall conform to ASTM C881, be a 2 component, 100 percent solids, 100 percent reactive

compound suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces.

H. Nonshrink Grout: Euco NS by the Euclid Chemical Company or Masterflow 713 by Master

Builders. The grout shall conform to CRD-C-621-80, "Corps of Engineers Specification for

Nonshrink Grout."

2.5 MIX DESIGN

A. Preparation

1. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with

applicable provisions of ACI-318 and ASTM C94. Use an independent testing facility

acceptable to the A/E for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing

facility shall not be the same one used for field quality control testing unless this is

acceptable to the A/E. Submit to the A/E written reports of each proposed mix for

each class of concrete at least 15 days before the start of work. The mix designs

shall be submitted on the mix design submittal form included at the end of this

specification. Do not begin concrete production until the A/E reviews and approves

the mixes.

2. The design mix shall provide normal weight concrete with compressive strength as

indicated on the Drawings.

B. Water/Cementitious Ratio:

1. All concrete shall have a maximum water/cement ratio of 0.40 (5000 psi at 28 days or

more). This includes foundations, walls, and sidewalks.

C. Admixtures

1. All concrete slabs placed at air temperatures below 50 degrees F shall contain the

specified nonchloride accelerator.

2. All concrete required to be air entrained shall contain an approved air entraining

admixture. Use an air entraining admixture in all concrete structures and slabs

exposed to freezing and thawing or subjected to hydraulic pressure. This includes

exterior footings, footings at the perimeter of the building, foundation walls, retaining

walls, exterior sidewalks and loading docks.

a. 5 percent for maximum 2 inches aggregate

b. 6 percent for maximum 3/4 inch aggregate

c. 7 percent for maximum 1/2 inch aggregate

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 7

3. All pumped concrete, grout, concrete for floor slabs, and concrete with a

water/cement ratio below 0.50 shall contain the specified high range water reducing

admixture (superplasticizer) or mid-range water reducing admixture.

4. Use the amounts of admixtures recommended by the manufacturer for climatic

conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures

as required to maintain quality control.

D. Slump Limits

1. All concrete containing the high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer)

shall have a maximum slump of 6 inches unless otherwise approved by the A/E. The

concrete shall arrive at the job site at a slump of 2 inches to 3 inches and be verified;

then the high range water reducing admixture shall be added to increase the slump to

the approved level.

2. All other concrete shall have a maximum slump of 3 inches for slabs and 4 inches for

other members.

2.6 PROPORTIONING

A. Job Site Mixing

1. Mix materials for concrete in an acceptable drum type batch machine mixer. For

mixers with a capacity of one cubic yard or less, continue mixing at least 1-1/2

minutes but not more than 5 minutes after all ingredients are in the mixer before any

part of the batch is released. For mixers with a capacity of more than one cubic yard,

increase the minimum mixing time of 1-1/2 minutes by 15 seconds for each additional

cubic yard of capacity or fraction thereof.

2. For each batch discharged and used in the work, provide a batch ticket indicating the

project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and

amount of water introduced.

B. Ready Mix Concrete

1. Comply with the requirements of ASTM C94 and of these specifications.

2. During hot weather or under conditions that contribute to rapid setting of concrete, a

shorter mixing time than that specified in ASTM C94 may be required. When the air

temperature is between 85 degrees and 90 degrees F, reduce the mixing and

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when the air temperature is above 90

degrees F, reduce the mixing time to 60 minutes.

3. Each load of concrete arriving at the job shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket

that shall be collected by the Contractor and submitted to the A/E and shall contain

the following information:

a. The design mix and strength of mix of concrete being delivered

b. The exact time the cement, aggregate, and water were discharged into the

delivery truck

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 8

2.7 SLAB-ON-GRADE TOLERANCES

A. Concrete Floor Flatness/Levelness

1. Flatness/Levelness Tolerance: All slabs shall conform to the following tolerances:

Floated or Broomed Surfaces: FF20/FL17 overall

FF15/FL13 minimum Local value

Trowel Finish: FF35/FL25 overall

FF20/FL17 minimum Local value

2. General Conformity to Design Grade: The entire floor shall fall within a 1/2 inch of

the floor elevations shown on the Drawings.

3. Expectations and Modifications: All floor tolerance measurements shall be

referenced to the as-built design grades shown on the Drawings, even when (as with

slopes-to-drain and pre-deflection cambers) such grades are not horizontal.

4. Floor Tolerance Measurements: Floor flatness and levelness tests on the random

traffic floor shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions set forth in ASTM E

1155-96 using a Dipstick® Floor Profiler manufactured by Face Construction

Technologies, Norfolk, VA or F-Meter by Allen Face Associates, Wilmington, NC.

Floor tolerance measurements shall be made by the Owner within 16 hours after

completion of the final troweling operation – and in all cases before forms and/or

shores have been removed. Results of all floor tolerance tests, including a written

notice of acceptance or rejection of the work, shall be provided to the Contractor

within 24 hours after data collection.

NOTE: Weekends and holidays shall be ignored when computing the testing and

reporting deadlines specified above.

5. Remedy for Out-Of Tolerance Work: All floor sections measuring at or above both of

the specified Minimum Local F-Numbers shall be accepted for tolerance compliance

as constructed. All floor sections measuring below either (or both) of the specified

Minimum Local F-Numbers shall be repaired if possible or removed at the direction of

the A/E.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FORMS

A. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support any vertical and lateral loads

that may be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct

formwork so that concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment,

elevation, and position. Design and construction of form work shall be the responsibility of the

Contractor.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 9

B. Design formwork so that it can be readily removed without impact, shock, or damage to cast

in place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.

C. Construct forms complying with ACI 347 and ACI SP-4 to the sizes, shapes, lines, and

dimensions shown on the Drawings so that in the finished structures the work will be level and

plumb and have accurate alignment, location, and grade within the tolerance limits of ACI

301. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications,

reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages, inserts, and other features that

the work requires. Use selected materials to obtain the required finishes. Butt joints solidly,

and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.

D. Fabricate forms so that they can be easily removed without hammering or prying against the

concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast

concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where the slope is too steep for the

concrete to be placed with bottom forms only. To form keyways, reglets, recesses, and the

like, kerf wood inserts to prevent swelling and to permit easy removal.

E. Where the interior area of formwork is not accessible for cleanout, provide temporary

openings to permit concrete placement and inspection before the concrete is placed. Brace

temporary openings securely and set them tightly to forms to prevent the loss of concrete

mortar. Position temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations.

F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown on the Drawings, using wood, metal, PVC, or

rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce smooth, uniform lines and tight edge joints.

G. Use metal form ties that are factory made, adjustable in length, designed to prevent form

deflection, and either removable or snap-off and that will prevent the concrete surface's being

spalled when the ties are removed. If snap-off ties are used, the portion remaining within the

concrete after removal must be at least 1-1/2 inches inside the concrete and be provided with

a waterproofing washer unless the Drawings indicate otherwise.

H. Unless the Drawings indicate otherwise, provide form ties that will not leave holes larger than

1-1/2 inches in diameter in the concrete surface.

I. Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate the work of other trades. Determine

the size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from the trades providing such work.

Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

J. Clean thoroughly forms and adjacent surfaces that are to receive concrete. Remove chips,

wood, sawdust, dirt, sediment, and any other debris just before the concrete is placed. After

concrete placement, retighten forms if necessary to eliminate mortar leaks.

K. Earth forming may be permitted when conditions allow, provided prior approval is obtained

with the Engineer of Record.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 10

3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. For details and methods of placing reinforcement and supports, comply with the specified

codes and standards, the recommended practice of the CRSI as outlined in "Placing

Reinforcing Bars," and these specifications.

B. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that

reduce or destroy the bond with concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork,

construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcement with metal

chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers as required for security.

D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverage for concrete protection as

required by ACI 318 and ACI 350 as applicable. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and

bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire

ties so that ends are directed into the concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2 inches beyond the last leg of continuous bar

support. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment or

similar construction loads.

F. Install welded wire fabric in lengths that are as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at

least one full mesh plus 6”, and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to

prevent continuous laps in either direction. Welded wire fabric shall be lapped 10” minimum.

3.3 JOINTS

A. Locate and install construction joints (which may not be shown on the Drawings) as approved

by the A/E so that the strength and appearance of the structure will not be impaired.

B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints that are in walls and slabs or

between walls and footings. Bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used if accepted by

the A/E. Omit keyway where steel waterstops are shown between walls and footings.

C. Construct isolation joints in slabs on the ground wherever there is contact between slabs on

the ground and vertical surfaces and wherever else indicated on the Drawings.

D. Install joint filler and sealant materials as specified by the manufacturer.

E. Construct contraction (control) joints in slabs on ground to form panels of patterns as shown.

The soff-cut saw system shall be used immediately after final finishing and to a depth of 1/3

slab thickness. A conventional saw shall be used as soon as possible without dislodging

aggregate and to a depth of 1/3 slab thickness, if the initial soff-cut did not achieve the 1/3

depth.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 11

F. Install semi-rigid joint filler or joint sealant in accordance with the direction of the

manufacturer.

G. The maximum joint spacing (in feet) of slabs on grade shall be 30 times the slab thickness (in

inches) unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Set and build into the work anchoring devices and other embedded items required for other

work that are to be attached to or supported by cast in place concrete. Use setting drawings,

diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by the suppliers of the items to be attached

thereto.

B. Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs in order to provide the

elevations and contours in the finished slab surface required by the Drawings. Provide units

strong enough to support the types of screed strips used, and secure with strike-off templates

or compacting screeds accepted by the A/E.

3.5 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES

A. Before placing reinforcement, coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form coating

compound.

B. Thin the form coating compound only with the amount and type of thinning agent and only

under the conditions recommended by the compound manufacturer. Do not allow excess

form coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete

surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply the form coating compound in

compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.

C. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust preventive form oil, or otherwise protect against

rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and

items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades that the formwork is complete so that

they may then install their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Wherever

form coatings are not used, wet wood thoroughly just before placing concrete.

B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with the placement of forms

and reinforcing steel.

C. Deposit concrete either continuously or in layers thick enough to prevent its being placed on

concrete that has hardened enough to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 12

within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as

herein specified. Deposit concrete as close to its final location as practicable in order to avoid

segregation due to rehandling or flowing.

D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner that

avoids inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, avoid cold

joints by placing each layer while the preceding one is still plastic.

E. Use mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping to

consolidate placed concrete. The equipment and procedures used to consolidate the

concrete shall comply with the recommended practices of ACI 309 and suit both the type of

concrete and project conditions.

F. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete once it is inside the forms. Insert and withdraw

vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no further apart than the visible horizontal

effectiveness of the machine. Limit layer heights so that the vibrator is effective into 6 inches

of the preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to

set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the

concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without

causing segregation of the mix. Lower frequency vibrators may be used with "flowing"

concrete.

G. Until the placing of a panel or section is completed, deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in

a continuous operation within construction joints.

H. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that it is thoroughly worked around

reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

I. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use highway bull

floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free from humps and hollows. Do not

sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces before starting finishing

operations.

J. Maintain reinforcement in the proper position during placement operations.

K. Cold Weather Placement

1. Comply with ACI 306 and the requirements herein specified to protect concrete work

from physical damage or reduced strength due to frost, freezing, or low temperatures.

2. When the air temperature has fallen or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F, heat

all water and aggregates uniformly before mixing so that the concrete, at point of

placement, will have a temperature of not less than 50 degrees nor more than 80

degrees F.

3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place

concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 13

4. Use only the specified nonchloride accelerator. Do not use calcium chloride or

admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions.

L. Hot Weather Placement

1. When the weather is hot enough to impair seriously the concrete's quality and

strength, place the concrete as specified herein and in ACI 305.

2. Cool ingredients before mixing so that when the concrete is placed, its temperature is

below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or else a portion of the water may

be in the form of chopped ice.

3. If reinforcing steel becomes hotter than the ambient air temperature, cool it with water

soaked burlap so that its temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature.

4. When high temperatures and/or placing or humidity conditions dictate, the mix may

be initially retarded by use of the water reducing, retarding formulation (Type D) of

the specified water reducing admixture (Type A).

3.7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough Form Finishes: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished work

or covered by other construction, use a rough form finish unless otherwise indicated by the

Drawings. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas, and rub down or chip off fins and

other projections more than 1/4 inch high.

B. Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces that are exposed to view or to be covered

with a coating or covering material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material

bonded to the concrete (e.g., waterproofing, dampproofing, painting, etc.), use a smooth form

finish. This is the as-cast finish obtained on the concrete surface when the selected form

facing material is regularly and symmetrically arranged with a minimum of seams. Repair and

patch defective areas so that all fins and other projections are completely removed and

smoothed.

C. Rubbed Finish: At all formed surfaces exposed inside and outside the building, apply rubbed

finish as follows:

1. Surface irregularities shall not exceed 1/8 inch in 5 feet for gradual irregularities nor

1/16 inch for abrupt irregularities. Fill over any air pockets or voids over 1/8 inch in

width, and surface smoothly.

2. Perform finishing after all required patching and corrections of major imperfections

have been completed, and complete within 24 hours after forms are stripped.

3. Thoroughly wet the surfaces, and begin finishing while they are still damp.

4. The mortar shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts sand (by dry volume) passing a

No. 16 screen, the bonding admixture SBR Latex by the Euclid Chemical Company,

and enough water to produce a mortar the consistency of thick paint.

5. Apply the mortar by rubbing thoroughly over the surface, using burlap or a sponge

rubber float, to fill all pits thoroughly. While the mortar in the pits is still plastic, rub

over the surface with a dry mix of the above proportions and material to remove the

excess material and to stiffen the mortar in the pits. After the mortar has thoroughly

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 14

hardened, wipe it with clean burlap to remove all surface mortar completely. The

entire operation for any area must be completed the day it is started.

D. Related Uniform Finishes:

1. At the tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces that are next to

formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture that matches the adjacent

formed surfaces. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, continue the final

surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed finishes.

E. Float Finish

1. Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive a trowel finish or other

finishes specified hereinafter; to slab surfaces that are to be covered with membrane

or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand bed terrazzo; and as

otherwise indicated by the Drawings or schedules.

2. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until

ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when

concrete has stiffened enough to permit the operation of power driven floats or by

hand floating if the area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level the

surface plane so that the surface conforms to the specified FF/FL17 tolerance.

F. Trowel Finish

1. Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view,

unless otherwise indicated by the Drawings, and to slab surfaces that are to be

covered with resilient flooring, paint, or other thinfilm finish coating.

2. After the slab has received a floated finish, begin first trowel finish operation using a

power driven trowel. Begin final troweling when the surface produces a ringing

sound as the trowel is moved over it. Surface shall be troweled until it is free of

trowel marks, is uniform in texture and has a smooth dense appearance, and

achieves an FF30/FL25 tolerance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would

telegraph through the applied floor covering.

G. Nonslip Broom Finish

1. Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps and

elsewhere as indicated by the Drawings or schedules.

2. Immediately after float finishing, roughen the concrete surface slightly by brooming

perpendicular to the main traffic route with a fiber bristle broom. Texture shall be as

approved by A/E from sample panels.

H. Nonslip Finish: Where the contract documents require a nonslip finish, give the surface a "dry

shake" application of crushed ceramically bonded aluminum oxide or other specified selected

abrasive particles. The rate of application of such material shall be not less the 25 pounds

per 100 SF.

I. Sealer/Dustproofer Finish: Apply a second coat of the specified curing and sealing compound

to interior concrete floors, not subject to vehicular traffic, where shown on the Drawings or in

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 15

schedules. The compound shall be applied in strict accordance with the directions of the

manufacturer and just prior to completion of construction.

J. Fine Broom Finish

1. Apply fine broom finish to interior concrete pads scheduled to receive ceramic tile or

quarry tile.

3.7 CURING

A. After placing and finishing the concrete, start initial curing of concrete as soon as free water

has disappeared from concrete surface. Keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.

B. Begin final curing immediately after final finishing. Continue final curing for at least 7 days in

accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 308. Avoid rapid drying at the end of the final curing

period.

C. Cure concrete by moist curing, moisture retaining cover curing, membrane curing, or

combinations of these methods, as specified herein and ACI 308.

D. Provide moisture curing by one of the following methods:

1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.

2. Spray it continuously with a water fog.

3. Cover the concrete surface with the specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating

the cover with water and keeping it wet; position the absorptive cover so that it covers

the concrete surface and edges and laps adjacent absorptive covers by 4 inches.

E. Provide moisture cover curing by covering concrete surfaces with a moisture retaining cover

designed for curing concrete. Place the cover in the widest practicable width of material with

sides and ends of the material lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or

adhesive. Repair immediately any holes or tears that occur during the curing period with

identical cover material and waterproof tape.

F. Provide membrane curing to slabs as follows: All interior slabs that have resilient tile or carpet

or are left exposed and all exterior slabs, sidewalks, curbs, etc., shall be cured with the

specified clear curing and sealing compound. The compound shall be applied immediately

after final finishing operations are completed. Apply uniformly in a continuous operation by

power spray or roller in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Areas that are

subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application shall be recoated. Maintain

continuity of coating, and repair damage during the curing period.

G. Cure formed concrete surfaces (including undersides of beams, supported slabs, and other

similar surfaces) by moist curing with forms in place for the full curing period or until the forms

are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by the methods specified above, as

applicable.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 16

H. Cure unformed surfaces such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by the

application of the specified curing and sealing compound, strippable curing compound or by a

moist curing method approved by the A/E.

3.8 REMOVAL AND REUSE OF FORMS

A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete (e.g., sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar

parts of the work) may be removed after curing at a temperature of not less than 50 degrees F

24 hours after the concrete is placed, provided the concrete is hard enough not to be

damaged by form removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are

maintained.

B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete (e.g., beam soffits, joints, slabs, and other structural

elements) may not be removed for at least 14 days nor until the concrete has attained a

design minimum compressive strength of 28 days. Determine the potential compressive

strength of in-place concrete by testing the field cured specimens representative of the

concrete location or members.

C. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after concrete placement only if shores and

other vertical supports have been arranged to permit it to be removed without loosening or

disturbing shores and supports.

D. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or

otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating

compound material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified above for new formwork.

E. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, clean surfaces thoroughly,

remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid

offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to

the A/E.

3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Unless the Drawings show otherwise or the A/E directs, fill in holes and openings

left in concrete structures for the work of other trades once that work is in place. Mix, place,

and cure concrete as specified herein to blend with in-place construction. Provide other

miscellaneous concrete filling shown on the Drawings or necessary to complete the work.

B. Nonshrink Grout: All column base plates, equipment bases, and other locations noted on the

structural drawings shall be grouted with the specified nonshrink grout. All exposed grout

shall be of the specified nonmetallic type.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 17

C. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams

where indicated on the Drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing

steel during concrete placement.

3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removing forms, when

acceptable to the A/E.

B. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie

rods and bolts down to solid concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make

edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar,

thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and apply the specified bonding compound. The

cement mortar shall be placed after the bonding compound has dried.

C. Remove and replace concrete with defective surfaces if these effects cannot be repaired to

the satisfaction of the A/E. Such surface defects include irregularities of color and texture,

cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the

surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out

form tie holes, and fill with dry pack mortar or with precast cement cone plugs secured in

place with bonding agent.

D. Where possible, repair concealed formed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect

the durability of the concrete. If such defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the

concrete.

E. Test unformed surfaces such as monolithic slabs for smoothness and to verify that the

surface plane meets the tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and

high areas as specified herein. Test unformed surfaces sloped to provide drainage for both

trueness of slope and smoothness with a template of the slope specified on the Drawings.

F. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability of the

concrete. Such surface defects include crazing, spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock pockets,

cracks that are more than 0.01 inch wide or that, regardless of width, penetrate either to

reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections, and other objectionable

conditions.

G. After the concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas in unformed surfaces by

grinding.

H. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface

finishing operations by cutting them out and refilling with fresh concrete. Finish repaired

areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when

acceptable to the A/E.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 18

I. Repair defective areas (except for random cracks and single holes not more than 1 inch in

diameter) by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound

concrete with clean, square cuts, and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 inch clearance

all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and apply the

specified bonding compound. Place patching concrete after the bonding compound has

dried. Mix patching concrete of the same materials to provide concrete of the same type or

class as the original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished

concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.

J. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in diameter by the dry pack

method. Groove top of cracks, cut out holes until sound concrete is reached, and clean to

remove dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply the

specified bonding compound. Place dry pack after the bonding compound has dried. Dry

pack shall consist of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16

mesh sieve. Mix with no more water than is necessary for handling and placing. Compact dry

pack mixture in place, and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously

moist for no less than 72 hours.

K. All structural repairs shall be made, with prior approval of the A/E as to the method and

procedure, using the specified epoxy adhesive and/or epoxy mortar.

L. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance by the A/E.

3.10 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform any or all of the tests specified below

and to submit reports on these tests. Sampling and testing for quality control during the

placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by the A/E:

1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, but modified for slump to comply with ASTM

C94

2. Slump: ASTM C143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge and one

test of each set of compressive strength test specimens

3. Air Content: ASTM C173 volumetric method for lightweight concrete; ASTM C231

pressure method for normal weight concrete; one test for each set of compressive

strength test specimens

4. Water Content: The water content of freshly mixed concrete will be tested each time

cylinders are made and as directed by the Engineer in accordance with AASHTO TP

23, Standard Method of Test for Water Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete Using

Microwave Oven Drying.

5. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F and below

or when 80 degrees F and above and each time a set of compression test specimens

is made.

6. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31; one set of 6 standard cylinders for each

compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed by the A/E. Mold and store

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 19

cylinders of laboratory cured test specimens except when the A/E requires field cured

test specimens.

7. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each 100 cubic yards or

fraction thereof of each concrete class placed in any one day or one set for each

5,000 square feet of surface area placed; 2 specimens tested at 7 days, 2 specimens

tested at 28 days, and 2 specimens retained in reserve for later testing, if needed.

B. When the frequency of testing provides less than 5 strength tests for a given class of

concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or, if fewer than 5 are

used, from each batch.

C. The strength level shall be considered satisfactory as long as the averages of all sets of

3 consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength f'c, and no

individual test result falls below the specified strength f'c by more than 500 psi.

D. When the strength of field cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory

cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting

and curing the in-place concrete.

E. Test results will be reported to the A/E and Contractor in writing on the same day that the test

is made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name

and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and

class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days,

concrete mix proportions and materials, and compressive breaking strength and type of break

for both 7 day tests and 28 day tests.

G. Non-Compliant Test Reports: All test reports indicating non-compliance should be faxed

immediately to all parties on the test report distribution list. Copies shall be on different

colored paper.

H. The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when the test results

indicate that the required strength level has not been achieved and other characteristics have

not been attained in the structure, as directed by the A/E. The testing service may conduct

tests to determine the adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders that comply with ASTM C42 or

by such other methods as are directed by the A/E. The Contractor shall pay for such tests

and any additional testing that may be required when concrete is verified to be unacceptable.

END OF SECTION

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

SITE-CAST TILT-UP CONCRETE 03 47 00 Page 1

SECTION 03 47 00 SITE-CAST TILT-UP CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 – General Requirements sections apply to this section

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following.

1. Site-cast tilt-up concrete panels. 2. Site-cast tilt-up insulated sandwich concrete panels.

B. Related Work: All permanently exposed exterior vertical and horizontal concrete surfaces Shall conform to special requirements in this section, addition to the requirements of cast in place concrete. It is the intent to produce exposed concrete surfaces of uniform texture and color.

C. Related sections: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the designated Sections:

1. Section 033000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete: Requirements for slab-on-grade design and construction and general requirements for concrete used in tilt-up panels.

2. Section 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashing to adjacent materials. 3. Section 099000 – Painting and Coating: Site-finishing of panels as applicable.

D. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of the following standards and regulations:

1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code – Steel. 2. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel. 3. ASTM A123/A123M – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on

Iron and Steel Products. 4. ASTM A184/A184M - Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for

Concrete Reinforcement. 5. ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete

Reinforcement. 6. ASTM A496 - Standard Specification for Deformed Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. 7. ASTM A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for

Concrete. 8. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars

for Concrete Reinforcement. 9. ASTM A706/A706M – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

03 47 00 Page 2

SITE-CAST TILT-UP CONCRETE

for Concrete Reinforcement 10. ASTM C31/C31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in

the Field. 11. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 12. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens.

13. ASTM C78 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading).ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

14. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. 15. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 16. ASTM C293/C293M - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using

Simple Beam With Center-Point Loading). 17. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing

Concrete. 18. ASTM C330/C330M - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural

Concrete. 19. ASTM C595/C595M - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 20. ASTM C989/C989M - Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and

Mortars. 21. ASTM C1157/C1157M - Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement. 22. ASTM C1697 - Standard Specification for Blended Supplementary Cementitious Materials. 23. ACI 117 - Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 24. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 25. ACI 305 - Specification for Hot Weather Concreting. 26. ACI 306 - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting. 27. ACI 315 - Standard for Details and Detailing Concrete Reinforcement. 28. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 29. ACI 551 - Guide to Tilt-Up Concrete Construction. 30. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and CRSI Specifications for Placing Reinforcement. 31. BSR/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 32. ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. 33. ASCE 37 – Design Loads on Structures During Construction. 34. Tilt-Up Concrete Association Wind Bracing Guidelines (TCA). 35. Tilt-Up Concrete Association Erection Safety Procedures Brochure (TCA).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit panel shop drawings and erection drawings detailing the Work of this Section including temporary bracing. Reinforcing bars shown on the project drawings do not allow for lifting and erection stresses. Shop drawings shall be stamped by a structural engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project and responsible for their preparation. Include the following:

a. Concrete mix designs for each mix specified.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


b. Mix design for structural grout for panel supports.

2. Shop drawings shall provide a full description of forming system and techniques including form liner, flat form material, steel support system, ties, joints in both liner and panels and rustications. Submit a written description of proposed construction methods including; method of reinforcing steel placement and tying, method of concrete placement description of vibration techniques, method of assuring alignment of form, release and curing agents and sand blasting approach.

3. Prepare shop drawings of each individual tilt up panel or cast in place surfaces receiving form liner or adjacent to form liner, showing layout of form liners and flat or full thickness surfaces. Indicate by mark each liner section showing top of liner and where it is cut or otherwise modified to show relationship to adjacent panels in order to insure continuity of pattern across joint between panels both horizontally and vertically.

B. Verification Samples for Exposed Finishes: Prior to construction of mock-up submit representative samples of exposed finishes for review. Samples shall be cast vertically and be approximately 18 by 18 by 2 inches in size.

1. Quality Control Submittals: Product Data: For each product, including bond breakers, joint sealants, insulation, connection devices.

2. Manufacturer’s Instructions: For manufactured items used, submit the manufacturer’s current recommended methods of installation, including relevant limitations and safety precautions.

3. Test Reports: Submit certified laboratory test reports confirming physical characteristics of materials used in the performance of the Work of this Section.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Where those requirements conflict with this Specification, comply with the more stringent provisions.

B. Qualifications for Tilt-Up Contractors: Contractor performing the tilt-up operations shall demonstrate the experience and expertise required to manage and execute the specified work.

1. Provide certification that supervisor to be employed in the Work has been ACI certified, meeting Site Cast Tilt-Up Supervisor qualifications.

C. Qualifications for Field Personnel: Contractor shall show evidence of competence in site cast tilt- up concrete construction. Workers shall be proficient in production and erection operations and shall be under the direct supervision of qualified personnel.

D. Qualifications for Welding: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the Work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months.

E. Job Mock-up Panel for Architectural Finishes: Prepare one panel using forming technique and construction methods to be used on the project for each level of finish shown on the drawings according to the following:

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

03 47 00 Page 4


1. Panels shall be a minimum of 4-feet by 8-feet. Incorporate edge and reveal conditions as detailed on the project drawings.

2. For painted concrete finishes: Utilize full range of color as specified. Utilize reveal characterization as specified.

3. For abraded or exposed colored concrete finishes: Utilize full range size and colors in aggregate. Utilize full range of color in grout. Match the degree of abrasion (e.g. sand- blast, water-blast, retarder, acid etch, etc.) specified.

4. For textured or architectural liner finishes: Utilize full range of texture as specified. Sample shall consist of section showing integration of both horizontal and vertical liner joints.

5. For cast-in-brick or stone finishes: Utilize full range of color sampling for brick specified. Sample shall consist of one repaired brick in field of display.

6. Cast mock-up over slab joint or column joint if actual panels will be affected by these conditions.

7. Maintain approved mock-up for comparison with finish work. 8. Dispose of mock-up when project is completed or when directed by Architect.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Job Conditions: Comply with the following:

1. Do not construct formwork, place steel reinforcement or concrete, or erect panels during adverse weather unless approved measures are taken to prevent damage. During period of dry winds, low humidity and other conditions causing rapid drying, protect fresh concrete with an evaporation retardant (monomolecular film) or fine fog spray of water applied immediately after screeding and bull floating. Maintain protection until final finishing and curing compounds are applied.

2. For cold weather conditions, adequate equipment shall be provided for heating concrete materials and protecting concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather. Concrete materials and reinforcing steel, forms, fillers and ground with which concrete is to come in contact shall be free from frost. If shelters are used, the type of fuel used for heating shall not weaken the concrete surface. Frozen materials or materials containing ice shall not be used.

3. For hot weather conditions proper attention shall be given to concrete materials, production methods, handling, placing, protection and curing to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation that may increase shrinkage and impair required strength or serviceability of the member or structure.

1.6 CONCRETE BATCHING AND MIXING

A. Thoroughly clean truck mixer drums, prior to batching architectural concrete. Load truck mixers at only the capacity which will ensure a uniform batch at the slump specified. In the event that mixing in truck mixer is not uniform the truck may either be rejected and not used on the project, unless allowed to mix only batches which will assure delivery of a uniform concrete of the specified slump.

B. When batching concrete pull aggregate from different areas of bulk stock for each batch of concrete to prevent effects of settlement showing up in finished concrete.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Concrete shall be delivered at such a rate as will assure that only fresh concrete is used.

D. Trucks containing finished concrete will be flagged or otherwise identified as special concrete trucks of a different structural concrete mix is being used on the project at the same time.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate site cast tilt-up operations with Work of other trades in order that Work may be expedited and omissions and delays avoided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TILT-UP CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. Comply with ACI 301, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

2.2 ADMIXTURES

A. The following listed admixtures shall be used in all architectural concrete. The manufacturers shall submit recommendations for the method of dispensing the admixtures with particular attention to possible undesirable chemical reaction between products when mixed in concentrated form.

B. Water-Reducing and/or Retarding Densifier (ASTM-C-494, Type A, Type D) as required. The manufacturer of the admixture shall submit in writing to the Architect, Engineer, and the Contractor special recommendations for quantities to be used under various temperature and job conditions to assure that the concrete can be maintained at a uniform consistency while in the mixer truck and sufficiently workable between lifts to prevent the occurrence of lift lines with reasonable vibration.

C. Air Entraining (ASTM C-260) The manufacturer of the admixture shall submit in writing to the Architect, Engineer, and the Contractor special recommendation for quantities to ensure 5% air in all architectural concrete. Concrete shall not be accepted which varies 1%, plus or minus.

2.3 CONCRETE PROPORTIONING

A. Mixes for Architectural Concrete shall be air-entrained mixes having a water-cement ratio not exceeding 5-1/4 gal. of water per sack of cement and a nominal (ultimate strength) strength of 3000 PSI at 28 days. Maximum slump of concrete as placed shall be 3”. Careful and constant consideration shall be given to the proportioning of the mix with the required percent of fines in the fine aggregate to be adjusted as required to produce a smooth finish.

2.4 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Forms:

1. Forms shall contain blockouts required to provide openings detailed on Drawings. Coordinate openings with other trades.

2. Panel boundary forms shall be rigidly constructed and well braced steel or wood forms, straight and with precise corners. Design to withstand stresses resulting from the casting process. Consideration should be given to exposed formed surfaces. Forming surfaces shall be smooth and clean prior to pouring of concrete.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

03 47 00 Page 6


3. Forms shall be attached to the finished building slab using non-intrusive glues and/or adhesives wherever possible in lieu of nails and bolts to eliminate penetrations and blemishes. Repairs shall be approved by the Architect

4. Panels may be stacked for ease of casting, in forms as specified above. When panels are stack cast, maintain a continuous sound and smooth casting to match the finish of the original casting surface.

5. Bondbreaker shall be compatible with curing compound and other finishes, including paint, and floor finish or be completely removed according to the manufacturer’s cleaning instructions.

B. Reveal Materials: Materials used for creating reveals or relief in the exterior face of the panel shall be of adequate strength to withstand construction traffic/loads without damage.

C. Concrete Materials:

1. Cementitious materials shall conform to ASTM C150, C595, C1157 or C1697. Portland cement shall be Type . Fly Ash shall be Type . GGBFS shall be Grade ..

2. Fine and coarse aggregates shall consist of clean, hard strong, and durable inert material, free of injurious amounts of deleterious substances, conforming to ASTM C33 for normal weight concrete and ASTM C330 for lightweight aggregate concrete.

3. Concrete shall be a design mix approved by Architect. 4. Mixing water shall be free of any acid, alkali, oil or organic material that may interfere with

the setting of the cement. 5. Concrete shall not contain air-entrainment admixtures. 6. Admixtures shall be approved by Architect. 7. Concrete shall be produced and delivered in accordance with ASTM C94.

D. Quality of Concrete: Ready-mixed concrete shall conform to ASTM C94. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days as indicated on the project drawings and as required for panel erection, or specified, and tested according to ASTM C39.

E. Sacking Materials: Portland cement and water, mixed to a uniform creamy paste.

F. Dry-Pack Materials: In accordance with requirements specified in Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

G. Steel Reinforcement:

1. Reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, or ASTM A706/A706M. For reinforcing bars conforming to ASTM A706, which will be welded, furnish a report of the chemical analysis for each heat of the bars.

2. Welded wire reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A185 or A497 based on type and location and shall be of the style shown on the project drawings. Welded wire reinforcement shall be supplied in flat sheets.

3. Bar mats for concrete reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A184. 4. Chairs and Bolsters, Form Ties and: Use stainless steel legs for all supports devices.

Select chair or bolster leg spacing to work with form liner so support is always on deepest area of liner.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


H. Lifting Hardware: Lifting hardware, inserts, braces, and related embedded and attached items shall be manufactured specifically for site cast tilt-up construction.

1. Randomly-Mixed Reinforcing Elements (Fibers): The use of materials mixed with the concrete for reinforcement are commonly applicable for reduction of plastic shrinkage and thermal expansion/contraction. They shall not be used as flexural reinforcement in structural panels, unless approved by a licensed design professional and reviewed by the Architect. Consult the manufacturer’s literature for proper material quantities and application procedures.

I. Miscellaneous Metals:

1. Provide inserts, dowels, and other items to be cast in panels, including items required for erection and bracing.

2. Steel that will be exposed to the exterior or damp environments in finished panels shall be plastic-tipped, hot-dipped galvanized or protected by other means to prevent corrosion or oxidation of the metal after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123. Ensure that the plastic will not create stress concentrations within the thin sections of concrete when located near a surface from differential thermal expansion and contraction ultimately resulting in local shear failure of the concrete surface producing surface blemishes.

J. Aggregates: Provide gap-graded aggregates: Course aggregates shall be limestone meeting ASTM C-33 size No. 57, 1” to No. 4 with the following gradation:

Sieve Size Percent Passing

1-1/2” 100%

1” 95-100%

½” 25-60%

#4 0-10%

#8 0-5%

1. Fine aggregate sand white sand with an F. M. of 2.00 to 2.20.

2. Purchase all aggregate need for entire project at one time from one source and take delivery of all material needed for project at one time. Maintain all aggregate is same condition. Turn overall bulk stock periodically.

3. Material: . 4. Gradation: . 5. Color Range: . 6. Sand-Cement-Grout Mix: . 7. Sand-Cement-Grout Slump Range in. to in.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

03 47 00 Page 8


K. Gray Cement: Purchase all cement from the same source.

L. Supports for Steel Reinforcement: Supports may consist of metal, all-plastic and concrete materials. Supports for steel reinforcement shall be designed to prevent spalling of concrete surfaces or streaking of panel face from corrosion. 1. Metal supports shall be either galvanized after fabrication or with tips protected with plastic.

No galvanized or plastic tip metal support shall be used on panels to receive exposed or sandblasted finish.

2. All-plastic supports should be of such design as to adequately support reinforcement, provide minimal surface contact and be of such coloring as to not be distinguishable on any surfaces. Minimal surface contact is defined as having a total contact surface area not to exceed 0.10 square inches (64.5 mm²) per contact point. Refer to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.

3. Concrete supports may only be used in situations where surface contact is not visible.

2.5 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS

A. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:

1. Liquid-type membrane-forming curing compound complying with ASTM C309, Type I and I D, Class B. It is preferred that the curing compound/bondbreaker be the same product or compatible, and that only one manufacturer’s product is used.

2. Concrete Curing of Casting Beds: Concrete in and around those areas to be used for casting shall be cured after finishing and as soon as the free water on the surface has disappeared and no water sheen is visible, but not so late that the liquid curing compoundwill be absorbed into the concrete. The cure and/or bondbreaking compound should be applied at the manufacturer’s recommended coverage to achieve minimum moisture loss.

3. Curing compound must be compatible with the bond breaker and other finishes, including paint, and floor finish.

B. Reusable Wet Cure Covers: Impregnated fiber mat with a white or light colored backing having low permeability with high moisture retention to maintain the proper moisture content during the concrete curing process. Comply with ASTM C171 for reflection and moisture retention.

2.6 SANDWICH INSULATION SYSTEMS

A. Insulated concrete sandwich panels shall be constructed to provide a continuous layer of insulation throughout the entire panel surface. No cross section of the panel shall contain less than the specified minimum R-value below unless compliance is proven through performance- based analysis and reviewed by the Architect.

B. Insulated concrete sandwich panels shall be constructed to maintain the effective acceptable material R-value of the panels with less than one percent reduction due to the wythe connections through the insulation. The reduction in thermal performance shall be calculated using the Isothermal planes method of R-value calculation as provided by ASRHAE 90.1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

1. Minimum R-Value: .

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. A continuous vapor retarding membrane with a minimum thickness of mil shall be installed between the outer wythe of concrete and the insulation system prior to the placement of the insulation system. All joints in the vapor retarding membrane shall be taped with a minimum 2 inch wide adhesive tape product.

2.7 SEALANTS

A. Sealants and Caulking: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section - Section Joint Sealants.

2.8 BONDBREAKER

A. Liquid Dissipating Membrane-Forming Curing Compound.

1. The bond breaking material shall also be a dissipating membrane forming material complying with ASTM C 309-98a, Type I and I D, Class B.

2. The bond breaking compound shall be applied with adequate time to dry prior to placement of reinforcing steel.

3. The bond breaking compound shall dry in 30-minutes or less at 100°F to reduce panel clean up.

4. Material shall be compatible with curing material. 5. The bond breaker used shall be fully removed from the slab surface or shall be compatible

with any curing compound or coating specified for interior or exterior concrete panels and slab

B. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for the proper cleaning procedures and finished surface preparation for the building slab, for proper procedures for post applying a liquid floor hardener or sealant to areas where bond breaker is present, and for proper cleaning procedures for preparation of painted surface and sealer applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CASTING SURFACES

A. Casting Slab Preparation:

1. Casting slab shall be cured. Saw cuts, cracks, joints or defects in the casting bed shall be filled so as to minimize transfer of the joint line to the panel face.

2. Waste slabs, if used, shall be of sufficient thickness and strength so as not to crack with the weight of the panels.

3. Contractor shall be responsible for compatibility of curing agents, sealants, and releasing agents utilized in the Work. If panels are to be stacked, the troweled surface shall be considered the casting bed and shall be treated as the same.

4. Isolation pockets shall be formed in such a manner as to minimize the transfer of the pocket to the finished appearance of the panel.

B. Bondbreaker shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions for the applicable condition.

C. Locate and install all inserts and anchorages required for the panels prior to casting of any concrete.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

03 47 00 Page 10


Wet-setting of any insert is not permitted and wet-setting of any anchorage is not permitted unless approved by the Architect.

D. After placing steel reinforcement for panels, check casting slab surfaces for continuity of bondbreaker. If touch-up or recoating of worn, damaged or missing areas is required, the Contractor shall remove the steel reinforcement entirely prior to re-application of the bondbreaker unless approved by the Architect.

E. Make joints in forms water tight. Use only non-staining form release agent. Seal form tie penetrations.

3.2 FORMING PANELS

A. Layout the panels for casting in a manner that minimizes the locations of floor joints, column isolation joints and other construction joints in the panel faces. Prevent the layout of the panels over temporarily poured casting surfaces such as pre-formed columns and pits unless deemed absolutely necessary.

B. Forms shall be designed to maintain the perimeter of the panel as shown on the project drawings within 1/4-inch maximum deflection during pouring.

C. Formed blockouts for openings in the panels shall be designed to limit the deflection during pouring to a maximum of 1/8 inch. Where reveals are specified in panels, assure that forming strips are straight and securely fastened to prevent movement or floating during placing operations and that alignment between adjacent panels is correct. Reveal tolerances shall comply with requirements specified in this Section.

D. Use adequate steel supports to maintain clearance to finished surfaces. Use breakaway stainless-steel flush form ties without cones. When tying steel take extreme care to make certain excess tie wire is cut short and cannot reach finished surface.

E. Pre-Placement Cleaning: After completion of forming and steel placement and immediately before placing concrete. Vacuum and air blow all casting surfaces to remove all foreign material.

3.3 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with recommendations in ACI 309 and the following:

1. Concrete shall be thoroughly worked around reinforcement, around the embedded items, and into corners of the forms.

2. Cold joints shall not be permitted in an individual site cast tilt-up panel.

3.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

A. Pre-placement testing.

1. Test coarse aggregate for dry rodded unit weight whenever a sieve analysis is made, and when it

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


appears that there has been a change in the characteristic of the aggregate. ASTM C-29.

2. Inspect trucks used to transport architectural concrete to assure that they are clean and in condition to mix and to deliver a uniform mix at a low slump.

3. Inspect aggregate stockpiles and storage and bring to the attention of the concrete producer and to the Architect any practices which are causing segregation or contamination within the stockpiles.

B. Field Testing

1. The Contractor shall make and store a minimum of four 6x12 cylinders or five 4x8 cylinders and four 6x6x24 beams in accordance to ASTM C31. Specimens shall be made for each class of concrete, for each 100 cu.yds. or fraction thereof, and for each day concrete is cast, or not less than once for each 5,000 sq.ft. of panel area.

2. Test cylinders shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C39. A minimum of 2 from each set shall be tested at 7 days and the rest at 28 days.

3. Test beams shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C78. At least two from each set shall be tested prior to panel erection. The average of the two beam results shall be considered the tested flexural strength to determine if the specified flexural strength has been met. Remaining specimens shall be kept in reserve in the event that additional testing is needed.

4. Test specimens and test reports shall accurately indicate in which panel, by number and concrete delivery tag, the concrete represented by each test specimen was placed.

5. Copies of test reports shall be distributed to Owner, Architect, Building Official and Contractor. Reports shall indicate location of tests, dates, technician, and other pertinent information

6. Determine air content with every set of cylinders. ASTM C-231

7. Furnish experienced concrete inspector to establish daily batch weights and inspect concrete at job site during placement.

C. Deficient Compressive Strength: In the event that concrete tests indicate a 7-day or 28-day strength below that which was specified, the Contractor with the agreement of the Architect shall have the mix adjusted so that subsequent concrete will comply with the minimum strength requirements.

1. The Owner may require core specimens to be taken and tested, at the Contractor’s expense. If core tests fall below minimum requirements, as determined by the Architect, the concrete in place will be deemed to be defective.

2. This concrete shall be removed and replaced or strengthened in a manner acceptable to the Owner and Architect, at the Contractor’s expense.

3. Demolition or repair of other materials or systems as a result of repair or replacement of defective concrete shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

03 47 00 Page 12


3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with recommendations in ACI 308 and the following:

1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete.

2. Apply liquid membrane curing compound in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Underlying panels in a stack cast arrangement shall be cured in the same manner as casting beds.

B. Moist Curing in lieu of Liquid Membranes for Curing:

1. Cover panels completely with burlap strips immediately after finishing. Lay as many lines of soaker hose as needed. Quickly and completely wet the entire exposed surface.

2. Cover panels completely with 4-mil polyethylene, transguard or burlene to prevent evaporation. The panels shall be kept wet for seven days. Do not allow alternate wetting and drying. The polyethylene shall be turned over and down the edge of the forms and securely fastened.

3. In panels or areas to be cured, weight the polyethylene, transguard or burlene with enough and type of weight to prevent normal winds for the area from blowing it off the panels. Keep panels wet until erection begins or approved by the Architect.

3.6 CASTING TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions of the finished panels, prior to erection in the structure, shall conform to the casting tolerances stated below unless otherwise specified or approved by the Architect.

B. Deviation from Specified Height or Width of Structural Panel:

1. Up to 20 feet Plus or minus 1/4 inch 2. 20 feet to 30 feet Plus or minus 3/8 inch 3. Each additional 10-foot increment in excess

of 30 feet Plus or minus 1/8 inch 4. Maximum overall tolerance Plus or minus 5/8 inch

C. Deviation from Specified Panel Thickness: Note the tolerance listed is for the average variation of panel thickness through any cross-section of the panel.

1. Variation Plus or minus 3/8 inch

D. Deviation in Length of Diagonals for a Rectangular Member or Opening, where Length of Diagonal is as follows. Note the tolerance listed is the measured difference in length of the two diagonals across any rectangle.

1. 6 ft. or less Plus or minus 1/8 inch 2. Each additional 6 ft. or part thereof Plus or minus 1/8 inch

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3. Not to exceed Plus or minus 1/2 inch

E. Deviations from Specified Size:

1. Rough opening Plus or minus 1 inch 2. Finished opening Plus or minus 1/2 inch 3. Rustication or architectural feature Plus or minus 1/8 inch

F. Deviation from Specified Location (any direction):

1. Blockout or opening Plus or minus 1 inch 2. Bolts, pipes or sleeves Plus or minus 1/2 inch 3. Lifting and bracing inserts per

manufacturer’s specs, not to exceed Plus or minus 1 inch 4. Embeds Plus or minus 1 inch 5. Reglets for flashing or bricks Plus or minus 1/4 inch 6. Rustication or architectural feature Plus or minus 1/8 inch 7. Electrical box or accessory of another trade Plus or minus 1 inch

G. Deviation from Plane:

1. Embeds (Tipping & Flushness) Plus or minus 1/4 inch 2. Surface of concrete between embeds Plus or minus 1/4 inch 3. Depth of recess Plus or minus 1/4 inch

H. Deviation from Specified Position of Reinforcement:

1. Cover, in accordance with ACI 318 and in no case less than specified elsewhere Plus or minus 1/4 inch

2. Individual member (location) Plus or minus 1/4 inch 3. Perpendicular to plane of span Plus or minus 1/4 inch 4. Parallel to plane of span Plus or minus 1 inch

I. Dimensions of Thin-Brick Elements Incorporated into Tilt-up Panels:

1. Thickness, variation Plus 0, minus 1/16 inch 2. Maximum thickness 1 inch

3. Minimum thickness 1/2 inch 4. Unit dimension 8 inches or less, variation Plus 0, minus 1/16 inch 5. Unit dimension greater than 8 inches, variation Plus 0, minus 3/32 inch

3.7 PANEL FINISH

A. Finish exposed surfaces of panels as indicated on the Drawings including both the front and back of the panels as well as any exposed edges as defined below. Visible surfaces of the panels, when in place shall be free from surface defects as defined below.

B. Grade A - Architectural: Projects designed for the circulation of people within a distance of 10 feet to 25 feet.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

03 47 00 Page 14


1. Panel surfaces shall be free of voids, holes, pockets and other surface deformations greater than 1/8 inch.

2. Surfaces of panels shall not project reinforcing patterns, floor joints or other projections or voids from the casting surface.

3. Cracks are not permissible in excess of 1/32 inch. 4. Surface repairs shall be performed in such a way as to prevent the projection of repair

strokes through the intended finish. 5. Holes shall be filled with patching material to present a smooth surface ready for painting

unless the designed finish is to result in exposed aggregates whereby the patching material shall match the intended color and texture.

C. Grade B - Standard: Projects designed for the circulation of people within a distance greater than 25 feet while retaining an emphasis on quality finishes and aesthetic detail.

1. Panel surfaces shall be free of all voids, holes, pockets and other surface deformations greater than 1/4 inch.

2. Surfaces of panels may be repaired sufficiently to prevent excessive projection of blemishes through intended finish.

3. Cracks are permissible as naturally resulting from curing. Cracks are not permissible as caused by erection forces.

4. Surface repairs shall improve the appearance of the panels within the descriptions above provided they do not result in additional blemishes that are visible within the distance set.

5. Holes shall be filled with patching material to present a smooth surface ready for painting unless the designed finish is to result in exposed aggregates whereby the patching material shall match the intended color and texture.

D. Grade C - Utility: Projects designed for remote areas with little or no public interaction and/or projects designed specifically for interior use with little or no emphasis towards the exterior design.

1. Consult with the Architect and the Owner prior to initiating the project to determine the expectations for the project appearance.

2. Panel surfaces showing voids, holes, pockets and other surface deformations are permissible provided they do not weaken the structural integrity of the panel or the finish of the panel/

3. Cracked surfaces are permissible provided the cracks are not resulting from structural weakness or failure and provided they do not present the potential for failure of the finish over the life of the building.

E. Surfaces to be painted shall be prepared to receive paint finish as specified in Section 099000 – Painting and Coating.

3.8 HANDLING AND ERECTION OF PANELS

A. Engineer panels for erection stresses and selection of lifting system and hardware.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Minimum strength of panels at time of erection shall be in accordance with the lifting design.

2. It is recommended that the Contractor take extra test specimens and field cure to verify concrete strength of panels.

3. Before starting erection operations, Contractor shall check relevant job site conditions insofar as they are ready for the erection of panels. Each element shall be properly marked to correspond with the designation indicated on the approved Shop Drawings.

4. Use erection equipment that will prevent damage to existing construction, permanent floor slabs and panels. Damage to Work shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor’s expense and in a manner acceptable to the Architect prior to painting or coating.

5. Temporary panel bracing shall not be removed until roof diaphragm is completely welded and installed.

B. Set panels in the position assigned. Place panels evenly on prepared setting pads or proper- capacity shims. Grout space under panels for full bearing or provide additional support until grouting takes place.

1. Provide sufficient number of shims to adequately distribute the load on the footing or grout as soon as practical to prevent damage of the footing.

C. Panels not attached to the building frame at the time of erection shall be braced in position using a bracing system designed to resist wind and other loads that may reasonably be determined until structural connections have been made. There shall be a minimum of two braces per panel. Engineering of bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Panel bracing connection shall be maintained daily to assure tightness.

D. Dry-pack grout installation and preparation for weld pockets and other panel block outs not cast in during pouring shall be performed as follows:

1. Remove laitance down to sound concrete 2. Surface to receive grout shall be rough and reasonably level 3. Surface shall have been properly wet cured 4. Do not use curing compounds 5. Clean surface of oil, grease, dirt and loose particles. 6. Remove free water from concrete and bolt holes immediately before grouting.

E. After Panels are Erected:

1. Check connecting bolts at the floor and panels daily to ensure tightness. 2. Protect elements to prevent staining, warping or cracking. After panels are erected,

dismantle panel erection devices and patch panels as required for a uniform appearance. 3. After panels are erected, patch holes or other blemishes in casting slab that were caused

by the panel casting and erection processes in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

03 47 00 Page 16


3.9 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erection Tolerances: Dimensions of the finished panel in the erected position in the structure shall conform to the erection tolerances stated below unless otherwise specified or approved by the Architect.

B. Deviation from Specified Dimension Between Controlling Surface or Line and Building Reference Line:

1. Horizontal dimension to vertical surface Plus 1/2 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 2. Vertical dimension to horizontal surface Plus 1/4 inch, minus 1/2 inch. 3. From top elevation Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

C. Deviation from Plumb of the Controlling Surface or Line:

1. Any 10 feet of member height Plus or minus 1/4 inch 2. Each additional 10 feet of height Plus or minus 1/4 inch 3. Not to exceed Plus or minus 1 inch

D. Deviation from Specified Relationship of Adjacent Members:

1. Matching edges at horizontal and vertical joints Plus or minus 1/2 inch 2. Matching faces exposed to view Plus or minus 3/8 inch 3. Matching faces not exposed to view Plus or minus 3/4 inch 4. Bowing between adjacent members 1/2 inch 5. Alignment of brick mortar joints across

joints, jog in alignment. 1/8 inch 6. Alignment of brick mortar joints across

joints, alignment with panel centerline Plus or minus 1/8 inch

E. Deviation from Specified Joint Width:

1. Vertical joint (governs over joint taper), total Plus or minus 3/8 inch. 2. Horizontal joint (governs over joint taper), total Plus or minus 3/8 inch 3. Visually noncritical joint Plus or minus 1/2 inch 4. Joint taper over any 10 ft. length measured

between the panels at the exterior face of the panels at the joint. 3/8 inch

5. Joint taper over entire length measured between the panels at the exterior face of the panels at the joint Plus or minus 1/2 inch

6. Variation in width of exposed brick mortar joints measured difference in joint width indicating the panel edges are not parallel Plus or minus 1/8 in

F. Deviation of Architectural Features at Face of Panel:

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Brick (individual) out of plane, any one Minus 1/4 inch depth of form liner joint.

2. Brick (individual) tipping, any one Minus 1/4 inch depth of form liner joint

3. Brick (individual) out of square, any one Plus or minus 1/16 inch 4. Brick (field), max. per panel 2 percent

3.10 SEALING OF PANEL JOINTS

A. Clean the panel joints of contaminants, including form release agents and concrete laitance. Dust and loose particles shall be blown out or otherwise cleaned to provide proper bond. Apply sealants in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Install fire-resistive blanket where indicated.

C. Install joint insulation where indicated to consist of a limited expansion polyurethane insulation or an approved equal as provided in accordance with Section 072000 – Insulation.

D. Install back-up rod, primer, paint and sealant in accordance with Section 079200 – Sealants and Caulking.

3.11 ATTACHING PANELS TO BUILDING FRAME

A. Perform welding in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4. Wait a minimum of 28 days from panel casting before making panel-to-panel welds.

3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove trash, debris, surplus materials, tools and equipment from site on a regular basis.

B. After erection, the General Contractor shall protect site-cast tilt-up concrete surfaces from damage by subsequent construction operations until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 1 of 15

Section 04 20 00

Unit Masonry Assemblies

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Concrete unit masonry

2. Installation requirements for pre-cast concrete trim.

3. Reinforcement and anchorages.

4. Concealed flashing.

5. Cavity and masonry void insulation.

6. Building in of items and anchors shown as built into or embedded in masonry.

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

B. Division 03: Architectural Precast Concrete for product requirements.

C. Division 05: Structural Steel Framing, for furnishing and installing connections attached to structural-steel framing; Metal Fabrications, for loose steel lintels and anchors for fabrications embedded in masonry.

D. Division 07: Water Repellents, for water-repellent finish treatments; Joint Sealants, for exterior and interior applications.

E. Division 08: Hollow Metal Frames, for door openings set into masonry.

F. Division 15: Mechanical items built into or embedded in masonry, penetrations, and sleeves.

G. Division 16: Electrical items built into or embedded in masonry, penetrations, and sleeves.

1.2 SUBMITTALS – ACTION

H. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.

I. Product Data:

1. Each type of masonry unit; include information on compressive strength for CMU.

2. Manufactured reinforcement, ties, anchors, and metal accessories.

3. Insulation.

4. Flashing.

5. Masonry cement.

J. Shop Drawings:

1. Face brick and thin brick special shapes.

2. Reinforcement for engineered masonry; prepare drawings

K. Samples – Selection:

1. Colored Mortar: Available standard colors.

L. Samples – Verification:

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 2 of 15

1. Face Brick: Full size units of each type of exposed masonry unit; demonstrate full range of variation in colors and textures for each type.

M. Colored Mortar: Cured samples that demonstrate color and texture using same sand mortar ingredients to be used in the Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS – INFORMATIONAL

A. Pre-installation conference records.

B. Reports by independent testing and inspecting agency.


A. Reference Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures except as otherwise indicated.

1. Definitions stated in the Contract Documents take precedence over those stated in Part 1.1.2.

2. Notwithstanding publication dates listed in Section 1.3, comply with reference standards in effect as of date of Contract, unless otherwise required by law. Reference standards withdrawn or discontinued by their publishers shall not govern the Work.

3. Delete Sections 1.4 and 1.7, and Parts 1.5.1, 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 3.1.2, and 4.1.2, including all subordinate text.

B. Fire Resistance Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to assemblies with fire resistance ratings determined per ASTM E119 by UL or other agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Single Source Responsibility For Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or uniform blend within ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one source and by single manufacturer for each different product required.

D. Single Source Responsibility For Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

E. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct meeting per requirements of Section 01310. Schedule meeting after mockups have been constructed.

1.5 MOCK-UPS

A. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.

1. Typical first floor.

2. Typical upper floor with one standard size fixed wood window.

B. Include:

1. Pre-cast concrete trim (all shapes).

2. Steel stud and sheathing backup.

3. Vertical veneer expansion joint.

4. Veneer anchors.

5. Flashing.

6. Weep vents, mortar dropping collector, flashing.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 3 of 15

7. Sealant.

C. Location: As directed by Architect.

D. Size: Minimum 8 ft high by 8 ft long.

E. Provide suitable foundations and bracing needed for strength and stability to maintain mockup in undamaged condition.

F. Demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for use in the Work.

G. Clean exposed faces using materials and procedures proposed for final Work.

H. Revise materials and techniques as needed to achieve specified requirements, including appearance characteristics.

I. Accepted mockup shall serve as comparison standard for the Work. Maintain mockup in clean, undamaged condition.

J. Acceptance of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; esthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing.

K. Acceptance of mockups does not constitute approval of deviation from Contract Documents.

L. When directed by Architect, demolish and remove mock-ups from site.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING


B. Protect masonry units and mortar materials from absorbing moisture before installation. Dry units that become wet.

C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, in dry location.

D. Protect bulk materials from contamination.

E. Maintain graded aggregates without mixture with other sizes or other materials.

F. Prevent metal accessories from rusting, and from accumulating dirt and oil.


A. Protect tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof covers while construction is not in progress. Extend covers minimum 24 inches down both sides and secure against displacement by adverse weather.

1. Where one wythe of multi-wythe walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover minimum 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe, and hold cover in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, soil, and other substances from staining masonry surfaces to be left exposed or to receive paint or coatings. Remove mortar, grout, and soil from such surfaces immediately.

1. Move scaffolding boards near masonry when not in use in order to prevent rain from splashing off boards onto masonry.

2. Protect bottoms of walls from rain splashed mud and mortar spatters.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 4 of 15

3. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar and grout droppings.

4. Protect finish surfaces of windows, doors, and other non-masonry construction from mortar and grout droppings.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not lay masonry units that are rain-soaked or frozen.

B. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions.

C. Cold Weather Procedures: Comply with ACI 530.1 Article 2.3.2.2 when ambient temperature or masonry unit temperature is below 40 deg F.

D. Hot Weather Procedures: Comply with ACI 530.1 Article 2.3.2.3 when ambient temperature is above 100 deg F or above 90 deg F with wind velocity greater than 8 mph.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)

A. Manufacturer: Obtain concrete masonry units from one manufacturer.

B. Hollow Loadbearing CMU: ASTM C90.

C. Unit Compressive Strength: Minimum 1900 psi.

D. Weight Classification: Lightweight units of nominal 95 pcf density manufactured with expanded shale aggregate produced by rotary kiln process, graded to uniform texture, and conforming to ASTM C331.

E. Curing: Steam treatment.

F. Block Size: Nominal 8 by 16 inch face dimensions for exterior back-up typically and nominal 6 by 16 inch face dimensions for all other, unless specifically otherwise indicated.

G. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture.

H. Special Shapes: Furnish special shapes where shown or needed for bond beams, lintels, corners, jambs, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2.2 PRECAST CONCRETE TRIM

A. Specified in Division 03: Precast Architectural Concrete.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Mortar Color:

1. Exterior Brick: Match existing color, texture and joint style on adjacent UT Cancer Research Facility located at 19 South Manassas Street, at the southwest corner of Madison Avenue and Manassas Street, and as indicated on Drawings.

2. Interior and Concealed Masonry: Standard gray.

B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of ASTM C150 Type I or Type III portland cement and ASTM C207 Type S hydrated lime.

D. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 5 of 15

E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.

F. Water: Clean and potable; free of staining substances and substances that adversely affect set or bond strength.

G. Water Repellent Admixture: Liquid water repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMU that contains water repellent by manufacturer of integral water repellent used in CMU.

H. Cold Weather Admixture: Non-chloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture conforming to ASTM C494 Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

1. Accelguard 80; Euclid Chemical Co.

2. Morset; W.R. Grace

2.4 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed billet bars, except #2 and #3 bars shall be Grade 40.

2.5 JOINT REINFORCEMENT, TIES, AND ANCHORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from a single manufacturer.

1. AA Wire Products Co.

2. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.

3. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.

4. Hohmann & Barnard, inc.

5. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. Of America.

6. National Wire Products Industries.

7. Southern Construction Products.

B. Base Wire: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel wire; ASTM A153 Class B-2 zinc coating.

C. Joint Reinforcement Fabrication: ACI 530.1 Article 3.2.1.1.2; 10 ft flat units.

1. Width: As needed to provide minimum 5/8 inch mortar cover in exterior joints, 1/2 inch in interior joints.

2. Supply factory fabricated corner and tee intersection units.

D. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; 0.1875 inch side rods, 0.1483 inch cross rods; hot dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; 0.1875 inch side rods, 0.1483 cross rods; hot dip galvanized after fabrication.

1. Cross Rod Spacing: Maximum 16 inches.

2. Number of Side Rods: One for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches in width, plus one side rod for each wythe of masonry 4 inches or less in width.

F. Veneer Anchors: Seismic type units consisting of metal anchor section and connector section designed to engage continuous wire embedded in the veneer mortar joint.

1. Anchorage Section: Formed steel strap with minimum 2 fasteners and self-adhering, modified bituminous gaskets manufactured to fit behind anchor plate and to prevent moisture from penetrating sheathing at pronged legs and screw holes.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 6 of 15

2. Connector Section: Trapezoidal or rectangular shapes formed from galvanized wire with connector for positive connection of continuous horizontal wire. Use wire thickness recommended by manufacturer for tie sizes, but not less than 3/16 inch diameter. Size wire tie to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 3/4 inch cover on outside face.

3. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.0677 inch thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

4. Fabricate wire connector sections from 0.1875 inch diameter hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

5. Continuous Wire: 0.1875 inch diameter hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

6. Galvanizing: Class B2.

G. Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer.

1. Size: As recommended by veneer anchor manufacturer, but not less than #10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange by minimum 3 exposed threads.

2. Organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Through-Wall Flashing: Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch thick formed with interlocking ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide integral mortar bond.

1. Provide lap and corner sealant recommended by flashing manufacturer for Project applications.

B. Membrane Flashing: Butyl or rubberized asphalt laminated with polyethylene facing.

1. Perm-A-Barrier; Grace Construction Products.

2. Waterproofing Membrane 104AHT; Royston Laboratories, Inc.

3. Polyken 620 Series; Polyken Technologies.

C. Core Cavity Weep System: Concrete unit masonry core weep system to allow for water to weep from the lowest point of the core and cavity of the wall.

1. Heckman Building Products No. 367.

D. Compressible Joint Filler: Compressible filler strips suitable for use with sealant specified in Section 07900; ASTM D1056, Type 2 (closed cell), Class A, Grade 1; compressible to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene or urethane.

1. Size fillers for 30–40 percent installed compression.

2. Size fillers so that edges are 1/2 inch from exterior masonry faces.

E. Control Joint Strips for CMU: Solid rubber strips with Shore A hardness of 60 to 80; designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry walls; sizes and configurations as needed.

F. Bond Breaker Strips: ASTM D226, Type I #15 asphalt roofing felt.

G. Weep Vents: One-piece, flexible extrusion manufactured from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, designed to weep moisture from masonry cavity to exterior, sized to fill head joints with outside face held back 1/8 inch from exterior face; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. "Cell Vent" or similar product.

1. Colors: Standard colors selected by Architect.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 7 of 15

H. Mortar Dropping Collector:

1. Mortar Net; AA Wire Products Company.

2. Mortar Break; Advanced Building Products, Inc. (distr. By York Flashings).

2.7 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Job Mixed Detergent Solution: 1/2 cup dry measure "Spic and Span" or other tetrasodium polyphosphate cleaner and 1/2 cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gallon of water.

B. Proprietary Cleaner: At Contractor's option, proprietary cleaners may be proposed for use, subject to Architect's approval.

2.8 MIXES

A. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specifically permitted. Request prior permission of Architect to use air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, and anti-freeze compounds.

1. Admixtures containing calcium chloride or other free chloride ions will not be permitted.

2. If cold-weather admixture is permitted, use same quantity in all mortar, regardless of weather, to ensure uniform color.

B. Keep sand uniformly damp at all times.

C. Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in mechanical batch mixers; comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water content.

D. Color: Mix mortar to produce colors of uniform appearance.

E. Mortar Mix: ASTM C270, Proportion Specification.

F. Mortar Types:

1. Type M: Masonry below grade, in contact with earth.

2. Type S: Reinforced, engineered masonry.

3. Type N: Masonry veneer, all uses where another type is not indicated.

G. Ready-Mix Mortar: At Contractor's option, ready-mixed mortar with set-controlling admixtures conforming to ASTM C1142 and Project requirements may be used instead of site-mixed mortar.

H. Grout Mix: ASTM C476; mix to consistency to completely fill grout spaces.

1. Use fine grout in spaces less than 2 inches in horizontal dimension.

2. Use coarse grout in spaces 2 inches or more in least horizontal dimension.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified in ACI 530.1 Where those tolerances are exceeded, do not install masonry until corrective measures acceptable to the Architect have been completed.

B. Verify that items to be built into masonry are in proper locations and complete with anchors.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 8 of 15

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary bracing needed for support and stability during installation. Maintain temporary bracing until permanent construction provides permanent bracing and stability.

B. Coordinate placement of anchors and other built in items.

C. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections

3.3 INSTALLATION –COURSING

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing and alignment.

B. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect masonry from displacement.

C. Match coursing, bonding, and joints of existing masonry.

D. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimensions. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform 3/8 inch thickness.

E. Fitting: Use full-size units where possible. Cut units to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjacent work. Produce clean, sharp, unchipped edges.

1. Cut brick with motor-driven saws.

2. Use dry cutting saws for CMU.

3.4 INSTALLATION –PLACING AND BONDING

A. Lay units that have variation in color in random arrangement without discernible pattern. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform blend of colors and textures.

B. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs unless noted otherwise.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back one-half unit length in each course; do not tooth unfinished edges. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, and wet in-place clay masonry units before resuming work. Remove insecure masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry.

D. Wet clay brick which have ASTM C67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 grams per 30 sq inches per minute. Wet units to be nearly saturated but surface dry when laid.

E. Lay solid brick-size masonry units in full bed of mortar with full head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints.

1. Lay brick on flashing without mortar in bed joints.

2. At cavity walls, slope beds toward cavity to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. As work progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against cavity face of brick.

F. Hollow Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Apply full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.

2. Bed webs in mortar in starting courses on foundations. Where cells are not grouted, spread full mortar bed, including areas under cells.

3. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to spaces that are to be filled with grout.

G. Precast Concrete Trim:

1. Clean soiled precast surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder, and rinse thoroughly with clean water.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 9 of 15

2. Wet precast joint surfaces thoroughly before setting.

3. Set precast units in full bed of mortar with vertical joints filled.

4. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes solid.

H. Fill collar joints between wythes solid with mortar or grout.

I. Buttering corners of joints and excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.

J. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.

K. Interlock each course of each wythe at corners and intersections.

L. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace the units in fresh mortar.

M. Tool joints when mortar is thumbprint hard. For exposed masonry tool joints at same consistency throughout the work to ensure color uniformity.

N. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile or other adhesively-applied finish is scheduled, and where bitumen dampproofing is indicated.

O. Isolate top joints of non-load-bearing masonry walls from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler except where firestopping is required.

P. Isolate masonry from shelf angles above with horizontal pressure relief joints formed with compressible joint filler.

Q. Isolate masonry from vertical structural members with minimum 1 inch clearance. Fill joint with glass fiber boards.

3.5 INSTALLATION – BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, build in metal door and opening frames and other built-in items.

B. Build in items plumb and level, accurately located and aligned.

C. Fill spaces in door frames and around other built-in items solid with mortar or grout. Rod mortar or grout to ensure that there are no voids and to form tight interface with masonry.

D. Bed anchors for opening frames in adjacent mortar joints.

E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place metal lath in joint below before grouting.

F. Fill cores in hollow CMU with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Exterior Door Frames: Insert extruded polystyrene board insulation around perimeter of frame in thickness indicated, but not less than 3/4 inch to act as thermal break between frame and masonry.

3.6 INSTALLATION – CAVITIES

A. Keep cavities behind veneer and weeps clear of mortar and debris.

B. Fill bottoms of cavities above flashings with mortar droppings collector. Set collector units in contact with adjacent units and without gaps that would allow mortar to collect in bottom of cavity.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 10 of 15

3.7 INSTALLATION – CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Do not form continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restrain of wall or partition movement.

B. Build in joint fillers of width to permit installation of sealant at proper depth. Maintain uniform slot depth.

C. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar.

D. Where indicated, install continuous control joint strips in slots to maintain alignment of wall.

E. Obtain prior approval of Architect for additional control and expansion joints requested by Contractor.

F. CMU Control Joints: Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar.

G. Brick Expansion Joints: Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod. Maintain joints free and clear of mortar.

H. Horizontal Pressure Relief Joints: Provide joints below shelf angles, structural framing members, precast concrete, other construction materials subject to deflection or creep, and where indicated.

1. Insert compressible filler into joints.

3.8 INSTALLATION – STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTI-WYTHE MASONRY

A. Use continuous horizontal joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints for bond tie between wythes.

B. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners, unless otherwise shown.

1. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement at corners using factory fabricated L units in addition to masonry bonding.

C. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes.

1. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement by using factory fabricated T units.

3.9 INSTALLATION – HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. Install reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend reinforcement 16 inches beyond opening jambs.

B. Install reinforcement continuous in first and second horizontal joints below tops of walls.

C. Lap reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.

D. Use factory fabricated L and T units for corners and intersections. Cut and bend reinforcement per manufacturer recommendations for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

E. Interrupt horizontal joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints.

F. Embed side rods in mortar with minimum 5/8 inch coverage at exterior faces of masonry, minimum 1/2 inch elsewhere.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 11 of 15

3.10 INSTALLATION – VENEER OVER STUD FRAMING

A. Masonry Veneer Over Stud Framing: Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to studs with minimum 2 screws.

B. Embed tie sections in masonry.

C. Locate anchor section relative to course where tie section is embedded to allow maximum vertical differential movement of tie up and down.

D. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o/c vertically and 24 inches o/c horizontally with at least 1 anchor for each 2.66 sq ft of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals around perimeter not exceeding 8 inches.

3.11 INSTALLATION – ANCHORAGE TO STRUCTURE

A. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors where masonry abuts or faces concrete structural members. Where masonry abuts structural steel members, anchor masonry with steel straps as indicated.

B. Space anchors as noted, but not more than 24 inches o/c vertically or 36 inches o/c horizontally.

C. Secure anchor sections to structural members. Position anchor sections so ties are centered on anchor section.

D. Provide open space of minimum 1 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep space open and free of mortar or other rigid materials.

E. Embed tie sections in masonry joints with minimum 5/8 inch mortar coverage.

F. Fasten lateral braces rigidly and securely to overhead structure.

3.12 INSTALLATION – LINTELS

A. Provide minimum 8 inch bearing at each jamb, unless shown otherwise.

B. Exterior Masonry: Install loose steel lintels. Provide bond breaks and minimum 1/2 inch clearance space at each end of steel lintels to allow unrestrained linear expansion.

C. Interior Concrete Unit Masonry: Install precast lintels or reinforced unit masonry lintels where shown or where openings in CMU more than 16 inches wide are shown without other support.

D. Reinforced Unit Masonry Lintels:

1. Place reinforcement bars in single, unspliced lengths.

2. Provide minimum 1/2 inch clearance between bars and face of masonry.

3. Support and secure reinforcement against displacement; maintain bars within 1/2 inch of dimensioned positions.

4. Provide temporary supports until lintels have attained sufficient strength to bear imposed loads.

3.13 INSTALLATION – FLASHING AND WEEPS

A. Install flashing at following locations to divert infiltrated water to exterior:

1. Below first course on foundation.

2. Lintels.

3. Shelf angles.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 12 of 15

4. Ledges and other obstructions.

5. Where indicated.

B. Remove projections which could puncture flashing. Remove loose particles and substances which could impair bond.

C. Place flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar.

D. Turn up back of flashing minimum 8 inches and seal watertight to sheathing, concrete, or masonry backup.

E. Extend flashing through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. At lintels, turn flashing down over outer edge of angle or window trim.

1. Exception: If self-adhesive flashing is used, treat outer edges per manufacturer recommendations.

F. Install opening sill and lintel flashing in single, unpieced lengths extending 4 inches beyond opening jambs, and turn up ends 2 inches to form end dam pans.

G. Extend flashing at shelf angles minimum 4 inches into masonry at each end.

H. Lap ends 6 inches and seal watertight. Seal penetrations, corners, and other joints watertight.

I. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn down to form drip.

J. Install weep vents in veneer at 32 inches o/c horizontally at following locations:

1. Above shelf angles and lintels.

2. Above through-wall flashing.

3. At bottoms of walls.

4. At tops of walls.

5. Where noted.

3.14 INSTALLATION – GROUTED COMPONENTS

A. Remove wastes, loose mortar particles, and other substances from spaces that are to receive grout.

B. Clean reinforcing of loose rust and other substances that impair bond.

C. Lap splices minimum 48 bar diameters.

D. Support bars and secure them against displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position.

E. Fill spaces with grout and consolidate to form full contact interface with reinforcement and masonry free of air bubbles and other voids. Place and consolidate grout without displacing reinforcing.

F. At bearing locations, fill cores in hollow masonry units with grout minimum 3 courses below unless noted otherwise.

3.15 INSTALLATION – ENGINEERED REINFORCED MASONRY

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Provide formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Make formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 13 of 15

2. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

3. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Lay masonry units with core cells and voids for reinforcing vertically aligned, clear of mortar, and unobstructed.

C. Place mortar in masonry unit bed joints back 1/4 inch from edges of grout spaces, beveled back and upward.

D. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure.

E. Place and maintain reinforcing bars within 1/2 inch of dimensioned positions.

F. Support vertical reinforcement in position at tops and bottoms of cells, and at maximum 192 bar diameter intervals between.

G. Wet surfaces of clay brick that will be in contact with grout.

H. Fill spaces with grout and consolidate to form full contact interface with reinforcement and masonry free of air bubbles and other voids. Place and consolidate grout without displacing reinforcing.

I. Low Lift Grouting:

1. Place first lift of grout to height of 16 inches and consolidate.

2. Place subsequent lifts in 8 inch increments and consolidate each lift.

J. Pour Heights For Fine Grout:

Minimum widths of grout spaces of 3/4 inch or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 2 inches:

Maximum 12 inches.

Minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2 by 3 inches:

Maximum 60 inches.

Minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches:

Maximum 12 ft.


Maximum 24 ft.

K. Pour Heights For Coarse Grout:

Minimum widths of grout spaces of 1-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 3 inches:

Maximum 12 inches.

Minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches:

Maximum 60 inches.

Minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches:

Maximum 12 ft.


Maximum 24 ft.

L. Cleanout Holes: Provide cleanout holes minimum 3 inches in least dimension for grout pours over 60 inches in height.

1. Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 14 of 15

2. At solid grouted masonry, provide cleanout holes at not more than 32 inches o/c.

3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


B. Provide testing by qualified independent testing agency.

C. Testing Frequency: Each 5,000 sq ft of walls or fraction thereof.

D. Mortar Composition and Properties: Evaluate per ASTM C780.

E. Grout: Sample and test compressive strength per ASTM C1019.

F. Evaluation of Quality Control Tests: Absent other indications of noncompliance with requirements, masonry will be considered satisfactory if results from construction quality control tests meet minimum indicated requirements.

3.17 ADJUSTING

A. Remove and provide new replacement units for masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, cracked, stained, or otherwise damaged, and damaged units, and for units which do not match adjacent units as intended. Install new units in fresh mortar without visible signs of replacement.

B. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying. Clean and reset them in fresh mortar. Do not shift units by pounding or other means which have already been set.

C. Point voids and holes (except weeps) full with mortar that matches adjacent joints in appearance. Prepare sealant joints for application of sealant.

3.18 CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Perform dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: Perform cleaning after mortar has cured minimum 2 weeks in warm weather, 3 weeks in cold weather.

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on mock-up panel, leaving one half uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with final cleaning.

C. Cleaning Method - Face Brick: Bucket and brush method described in BIA "Technical Note #20."

1. Do not use muriatic acid in any form.

2. Proprietary masonry cleaners may be used if approved in advance by Architect.

3. If proprietary cleaner is used, neutralize surfaces per manufacturer recommendations.

D. Cleaning Method - CMU: Remove mortar spots and dropping by dry brushing at end of each day's work and after final pointing. Comply with recommendations in NCMA Tek Bulletin #45.

E. Cleaning Method – Stone Trim: Comply with recommendations in the Indiana Limestone Handbook of the Indiana Limestone Institute of America.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 15 of 15

3.19 PROTECTION

A. Provide protection boards at exposed outside corners vulnerable to chipping and other damage from construction operations.

END OF SECTION

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

ISSUED FOR BID 05 12 00 Page 1 of 11

Section 05 1200

Structural Steel

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: A. Furnishing of, and paying for, all labor, materials, services, appliances, and equipment

necessary for the execution, installation, and completion of all work specified herein. B. Work Included: 1. Fabrication and erection of all structural steel, as shown on drawings and/or specified

herein, including but not necessarily limited to the following all structural steel rolled sections, such as beams, girders, columns, purlins, channels, angles, anchor plates, bearing plates, brackets, braces, loose lintels, shelf angles, anchor bolts, sleeves, bearing plates, inserts, and/or other items incidental to construction, or as normally required to complete the erection and support of all structural steel work specified herein.

2. Loose lintels, shelf angles, anchor bolts, sleeves, bearing plates, inserts, wedge

inserts, expansion joint plates, and other incidental items of structural and/or miscellaneous steel as required to be built into concrete or masonry must be provided as indicated on drawings or as specified. At the proper time, these will be furnished to the respective contractor, where applicable, including instructions or templates for installation within masonry and/or concrete construction.

3. All miscellaneous steel members supporting penetrations of roof deck. 4. All connections, erection fittings, and devices required to complete this work. 5. Shop painting and field touch-up painting. 6. All miscellaneous steel angles, beams, rods, and/or braces to be furnished and/or

installed for support or bracing of door frames, operable walls, and as shown on the drawings.

7. All other miscellaneous steel appearance items complete with brackets, etc. for

complete installation.

C. Work Furnished but Installed Under Other Sections: a. Section 03300 - Cast in Concrete; anchorages cast in concrete. b. Section 04200 – Unit Masonry Assemblies: anchorages cast in masonry

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Shop drawings, product data, and samples - General Conditions, Article 4, paragraph 4.12

and Section 01340 - Submittals of this Project Manual. B. Testing laboratory services - General Conditions, Article 7, paragraph 7.7 and Section 01 45

00 - Quality Control of this Project Manual. C. Cast-in-place concrete, including grouting of base plates and bearing plates - Section 03

3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete of this Project Manual.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

05 12 00 ISSUED FOR BID Page 2 of 11

D. Metal deck, including support framing for small openings - Section 05 3000 - Metal Floor and

Roof Deck of this Project Manual. E. Metal fabrications - Section 05 5000 - Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications of this Project

Manual. F. Metal stairs – Section 05 5100 – Metal Stairs of this Project Manual G. Finish painting – 09 9100 Exterior Painting and 09920 Interior Painting of this Project

Manual. 1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions, and DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS apply to the work of this section. B. Use this specification in conjunction with the General Notes and specific directives on the

Contract Drawings. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS: Perform work in accordance with the AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, except

as modified herein. A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. Manual of Steel Construction, thirteenth edition (2010) and Specifications for

Structural Steel Buildings, AISC Specifications (2010) and AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, 2010.

2. Quality Criteria and Inspection Standards, 1971. 3. Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, 2004. 4. AISC Quality Certification Program. B. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. Structural Welding Code (AWS D1.1), including the "Standard Qualification

Procedure," Section 5, Part B, "Procedure Qualification." 2. Guide for the Non-destructive Inspection of Welds (ANSI/AWS B1.0 [80]). 3. Guide to Standard for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors (AWS -

W1QC). C. Research Council on Structural Connections of Engineering Foundation: Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, 2004. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A6-84 General Regulations for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Piling, and Bars for Structural Use. 2. See materials specifications listed under Part 2 - Products of this section of the

Project Manual. E. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): A Guide to the Shop Painting of Structural Steel, SSPC AISC. F. Industrial Fasteners Institute: Handbook for Bolt, Nut, and Rivet Standards. G. American Society for Non-Destructive Testing (ASNT): Recommended Practice, (SNT-TC-1A). H. No provision of any referenced standard specification, manual, or code (whether or not

specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents) will be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, or ENGINEER, or any of their consultants, agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor will it be effective to assign the ENGINEER, or anyone of authority, to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of these Contract Documents.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS: A. Fabricator and erector must have completed a project of similar scope and must have

adequate facilities, personnel, and equipment to meet production and quality requirements and to maintain proper job progress. Certification by the AISC Quality Certification Program will provide satisfactory evidence of compliance.

B. Welding procedures, welders, welding operations, and tack welders must be qualified in

accordance with the AWS Structural Welding Code, Section 5. 1.06 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DESIGN: A. Where connections are not shown on drawings, the connections must comply with the

requirements of the AISC Specifications, paragraph 3.1.3. Where reactions and/or moments are shown on drawings, connections must be designed to accommodate these, subject to review and approval by the Engineer.

B. Substitutions of member sizes due to non-availability of materials must be of equivalent

strength and rigidity to that specified; must be compatible with the design and must be approved by the Engineer after being specifically called to his attention in writing.

1.07 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340 - Submittals and the AISC Code,

Division 4 clearly indicating profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, connections, attachments, anchorages, framed openings larger than eighteen [18"] inches square, size and type of fasteners, cambers, and all other details required for the fabrication and erection of the structural steel.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Submit descriptive data to illustrate the structural steel erection procedure, including the

sequence of erection and temporary staying and bracing. C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Clearly indicate net

weld lengths. Submit written description, as required, to illustrate each welding procedure to be performed.

D. Submit descriptive data for field welding equipment including type, voltage, and amperage. E. Submit the following for proof of material compliance: 1. Reports of ladle analysis for all steels. 2. Reports of tensile properties and bend tests for steel shapes, bars, and plates. 3. Certified mill test reports required by applicable ASTM Material Specifications (AISC

Code, Division 5). All high-strength steels exceeding 36,000 psi yield point (ASTM A36) must be identified in accordance with the Recommended Procedures for Identification of High-Strength Steels During Fabrication, as adopted by the AISC, (see AISC Code, Section 6.1, "Identification of Material").

4. Submit Certificates of Conformance for: a. Structural steel tubing. b. Shear studs in accordance with AWS Building Code, Article 4.27. c. Filler material for welding. 5. Reports of mechanical properties of headed-stud type shear connectors. 6. Reports of mechanical tests for high-strength threaded fasteners. F. Submit manufacturer's literature describing each type of welding stud and arc shield. G. Submit inspection and test reports according to article 1.08 below. H. Certification of Quality Assurance Program (see 1.08 below). 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. See Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control of this Project Manual; AISC Code, Section 8 and

AISC Specification Section 1.26. Both the fabricator and the erector must maintain a quality assurance program to assure that all work is performed in accordance with these specifications and the AISC Code and Specifications. Certification under the AISC Quality Certification Program will suffice. The AISC Quality Criteria and Inspection Standards, 1971, will establish acceptable practice, unless otherwise provided by this specification.

B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain control of the quality of the materials and

workmanship and conformance to the project specifications. C. Fabrication/erection inspection and testing of weldments must be provided by the Contractor

in accordance with AWS D1.1-83, Section 6. The fabrication/erection inspector(s) must be AWS certified welding inspector(s) in accordance with the provisions of AWS QCI, Standard for Qualifications and Certification of Welding Inspectors.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


D. Provide certification that welding inspectors, welders, welding operators, and tack welders

performing the work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous twelve [12] months prior to starting the work. If re-certification of welders is required, it will be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure compliance. Each welder working on the project must mark his identification symbol at each weldment completed, whether in the shop or field.

E. The fabrication and erection of structural steel (per AWS D1.1, Section 6) will be subject to

verification, testing, and inspection by the Owner or his representative, the Engineer, and/or the testing laboratory specified in Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Such verification inspections do not relieve the Contractor and his supplier of responsibility for conforming to the Contract Document requirements.

F. The testing agency (see Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control) will inspect or test structural

steel at the fabricating plant before shipment to the project as follows: 1. Base Material: a. Verify chemical composition of all steel. b. Verify mechanical properties of all steel (ASTM A370). 2. Fabrication: a. Verify qualification of shop procedures for type of steel construction specified or

elected by fabricator. b. Inspect shop-fabricated structural steel members and assemblies for

conformance with the requirements specified. c. Test requirements for materials specified herein or incorporated in referenced

documents may be waived provided certified copies of mill test or test reports from approved laboratories, performed on previously manufactured materials, are submitted and approved. Test reports must be accompanied by notarized certificates from the manufacturer certifying that the tested material was of the same type, quality, and manufacturer as that being supplied for this project. Tests must have been conducted no more that one [1] year prior to the date such materials are submitted for approval. Proper steels must be maintained throughout the fabricating process.

d. Inspection of shop welds must be in accordance with Sections 6 and 8.15 of the

AWS Structural Welding Code and as follows: I. Visual inspection of all shop welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, 6.5. II. All full penetration welds shall be tested with non-destructive testing

methods. The non-destructive testing rate for welds made by an individual welder is permitted to be reduced to 25% of the welds provided the weld inspection reject rate is 5% or less and a minimum of 10% of the total welds are tested. A representative sample of twenty-five percent of all full penetration welds and all questionable quality, full penetration welds must be non-destructive tested by one of the following as appropriate:

aa. Liquid penetrate inspection of the shop welds in accordance with

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


AWS D1.1, 6.5 (ASTM E165). bb. Magnetic particle inspection of the shop welds in accordance with

AWS D1.1, 6.7.5 (ASTM E105). cc. Radiographic inspection of the shop welds in accordance with

AWS D1.1, Part C, Chapter 6, "Inspection" (ASTM E94 and E99). dd. Ultrasonic inspection of the shop welds indicated in accordance

with AWS D1.1, Part C, Chapter 6, "Inspection" (ASTM E164).

III. Stud welding inspection of shop welded studs must be in accordance with AWS D1.1, 4.26.

IV. Five percent (5%) of all fillet welds shall be tested by an approved non-

destructive testing method. e. Inspection of Shop Painting: I. Surface preparation prior to painting must be visually evaluated for

degree of cleaning by comparison with SSPC pictorial standards. II. Measurement of dry film thickness of each coat of shop-applied paint

must be in accordance with ASTM D1005-72. G. Erection verification inspection and testing to be provided by the testing agency. 1. Verification of qualifications of field procedures and personnel. 2. Inspection of erected structural steel work for conformance with the requirements

specified. 3. Inspection of field-assembled high-strength, bolted construction must be in

accordance with AISC Specification for Structural Joints, Section 6, using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts.

4. Inspection of field welds must be in accordance with AWS Structural Welding Code,

Section 6, and paragraph 1.7.7.2D above. 5. Perform non-destructive testing as appropriate for all field welds of questionable

quality (or replace weld) and test ten [10%] percent of all full penetration field welds. 6. The fabricator, erector, architects, and structural engineer of record shall receive

copies of all inspection reports.

H. The Contractor must correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections and laboratory test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor's expense, as may be necessary to reconfirm any non-compliance of original work and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work.

1.09 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Delivery of materials to be installed under other sections:

1. Anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are embedded in cast-in-place

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


concrete or masonry construction must be delivered to the project site in time to be installed before the start of cast-in-place concrete operations or masonry work.

2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of the anchor

bolts and other devices. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Structural steel members which are stored at the project site must be above ground

on platforms, skids, or other supports so they are kept out of the mud. 2. Steel must be protected from corrosion. 3. Other materials must be stored in a weather-tight and dry place until ready for use in

the work. 4. Packaged materials must be stored in their original, unbroken packages or containers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: A. Refer to AISC Specifications, Section 1.4, "Materials." See structural drawings and General

Notes for specific requirements, unless modified or specified hereafter. B. Structural steel must conform to ASTM standards as specified on drawings. See AISC

Specifications, Section 1.4.1 for other grades of steel shown on the drawings. C. Bolts must conform to AISC Specifications, Section 1.4.4. 1. Unfinished bolts must conform to ASTM A307. 2. High-strength bolts must conform to ASTM A325, A490, or A449. 3. Anchor bolts and nuts must conform to ASTM A36/A36M. 4. High-strength anchor bolts must conform to ASTM 449. D. Filler metal and flux for welding must conform to AISC Specifications, Section 1.4.5. 1. AWS A5.1, E70 or E80 unless otherwise approved. Electrodes must be compatible

with the base material being welded. Manufacturer's certification must constitute evidence of conformance.

E. Non-shrink grout for columns and other bearing plates must comply with Section 03300 -

Cast-in-Place Concrete of this Project Manual. F. This contractor is to furnish male portion of all wedge inserts to be inserted within female

section of inserts furnished under Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete for support of steel members specified herein. Furnish all shims as required for alignment for all members.

G. Shop paint primer must conform to AISC Code, Section 6.5 and A Guide to Shop Painting of

Structural Steel, AISC-SSPC. 1. Dry interior where steel is embedded in concrete, encased in masonry, or protected

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


by membrane or contact type fireproofing are to be left unpainted. 2. Interiors permanently exposed to view, normally dry must conform to SSPC-PS 7.01-

64T, "One-Coat Shop Paint System" (SSPC Paint 13). 3. Exteriors permanently exposed to weather must conform to SSPC-PS 1.01 or 1.03-

64T, "Oil Base Paint System" (SSPC Paint 14). 4. The Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) content of all Paint must conform to

Tennessee Sustainability Guidelines

a. Finish Paint VOC limit is 50 g/L less water

b. Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates VOC limit is 250 g/L less water

H. Headed Stud-Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A-08 Grade 1015 or 1020, cold finished

carbon steel with dimensions complying with AISC Specifications I. Other materials must conform to the applicable current specifications of the ASTM. 2.02 FABRICATION AND DELIVERY: A. Conform to AISC Code, Section 6 and AISC Specifications, Section 1.23. B. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible.

Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with the approved shop drawings. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. Verify all dimensions prior to fabrication.

C. Dimensional and straightness tolerances must conform to ASIC Code, Section 6.4. D. Provide openings in structural members for other building components as shown on

drawings. Locate holes so as not to cause any appreciable reduction in strength of members and reinforce openings with steel plates and/or angles sized and welded in place to restore members to original strength as approved by the Engineer.

E. All openings through steel floor and roof deck larger than eighteen [18"] inches square are to

receive supplemental steel framing by this section of the work. F. Cut and mill column ends and bearing plates accurately to ensure full contact of bearing

surfaces prior to welding. G. Camber horizontal members to accommodate dead load deflections as indicated on the

Contract Drawings. See General Notes on structural drawings, AISC Specifications, Section 1.19 and AISC Code, paragraph 6.4.4.

H. Clean, prepare, and shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces to be field-

welded or to be bolted or in contact with concrete. I. Shop and field connections must be bolted, welded, or a combination of these as required to

conform to AISC Specifications. 1. Field Connections:

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


a. Bolted in accordance with AISC Specifications, except where welded connections are required or selected.

b. High-strength threaded fasteners must be used for bolted connections, except

where standard threaded fasteners are permitted. c. Welded connections must conform to AWS D1.1. Non-destructive testing will

be required on ten [25%] percent of all full-penetration welds. Welding materials must be of the type required for materials being welded and conform to applicable AWS Specifications.

J. Bearing Plates must be provided under beams, closures, and girders resting on footings,

piers, and walls as shown on the drawings with anchorage devices. Bearing plates must either be attached or loose as required for erection.

K. Metal Framing Appearance Items: 1. Form members to manufacturer's standard shapes meeting design criteria. 2. Cut right angle connections of framing components to fit squarely against abutting

members as shown on the drawings. Weld or bolt as shown. 3. Grind smooth all welds and holes cut in structural members exposed to view after

fabricating. 4. All items are to be square, straight, and true to detail in all respects. 5. Fabricate all items as shown on drawings and specified herein. All must present

smooth surface for use and appearance. L. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by Manufacturer of shear

connectors. Weld shear connectors in field, spaced as shown on drawings, to beams and girders in composite construction. Use automatic end welding of headed stud shear connectors in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Hand welding will not be allowed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed and notify

Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an

acceptable matter. 3.02 ERECTION: A. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchor bolts

and similar devices before erection work proceeds and report discrepancies to Contractor and Engineer.

B. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made or until compensating

adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with the Designer.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Erect structural steel in accordance with the drawings and as provided in AISC Code, Section 7 and AISC Specifications, Section 1.25, except as hereinafter specified.

D. Field Assembly: 1. Steel frames and/or members must be assembled accurately to the lines and

elevations indicated and within the erection tolerances specified in AISC Code, Section 7.11.

2. The various members forming parts of a complete frame or structure after being

assembled must be aligned and adjusted accurately before being fastened. 3. Fastening of splices of compression members must be done after the abutting

surfaces have been brought completely into contact. 4. Bearing surfaces and surfaces which will be in permanent contact must be cleaned

before the members are assembled. 5. Splices will be permitted only where indicated or approved in writing. E. Bearing plates for columns, beams, and similar structural members must be aligned with

wedges or shims before grouting. F. Make adequate provisions for all erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to

maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of necessary permanent bracing.

G. Do not field-cut or alter structural members without the written approval of the Engineer. H. Provide temporary shoring and bracing members and connections of sufficient strength to

bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds.

I. Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to complete work

effectively. J. Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to

foundations and other in-place work. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for pre-setting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. Refer to Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete of this Project Manual for anchor bolt installation in concrete and for masonry installations.

K. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to

improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface or baseplates and bearing plates. Set loose and attached baseplates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices.

L. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not

remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of baseplate or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.

M. On exposed, welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds, and grind

smooth at exposed surfaces. N. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections,

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. Do not enlarge holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes which must be enlarged to admit bolts.

O. Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in structural framing.

Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as acceptable to Engineer. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted.

3.03 PROTECTION: A. Do not use structural units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured into

position. B. Ensure that construction loads do not exceed carrying capacity of structure. 3.04 FIELD PAINTING TOUCH-UP: A. After the erection of all structural and miscellaneous steel members, touch-up paint all

abrasions and unpainted areas with the same paint used for the shop painting. B. All shelf angles and lintels which will have any part exposed to weather after completion of

work will receive prior to erection one [1] finish paint coat by Section 09 9000 - Painting. 3.05 CLEAN-UP: Remove all debris caused by the subcontract from the work site.

END OF SECTION

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

ISSUED FOR BID 05 2000

Page 1

Section 05 2000

Steel Joists

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The work under this Section includes furnishing materials, labor and equipment as required for the fabrication and installation of the steel joists indicated of the drawings and specified herein.

B. Related Work: The following items of related work are specified in other Section:

1. Structural Steel 2. Steel Roof Decking 3. Metal Fabrications


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing joists similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. Manufacturer must be certified by SJI to manufacture joists conforming to SJI standard specifications and load tables.

B. Applicable Standards:

1. Steel Joist Institute (SJI) "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series 2. American Welding Society AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code".

C. Performance Requirements: Engineer, fabricate and erect joists and connections to withstand

design loads within limits and under conditions required.

D. Inspection and Tests:

1. The materials to be furnished shall be subject to inspection in the mill, shop and field. 2. Joists shall be inspected by the manufacturer before shipment to assure compliance of

materials and workmanship with the specifications. 3. Welders shall be qualified for the type of work required. 4. 100% of joist connections shall be visually inspected by an independent testing laboratory at

the contractor’s expense.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 01 30 00, Submittals. No materials shall be delivered to the job site until the Architect has approved the submittals in writing. The shop drawings shall include but not limited to the following:

1. Fabrication and erection details including supports and bridging, showing layout, mark,

number, type, location and spacing of joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, accessories, splice and connection details and attachments to other units of work.

2. For joists indicated to comply with certain design loading, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

3. Two certified copies of all mill reports covering the chemical and physical properties of the steel used in the work.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

05 2000 ISSUED FOR BID

Page 2

A. Deliver, store and handle joists as recommended in SJI specifications.

B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation and other damage during delivery, storage and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Joists: Joists series and sizes are based on joists listed by the Steel Joist Institute. Steel joists shall be open web series, size and type as shown on the drawings. All top and bottom chords and bearing members shall be double angles. Joists shall be cambered for dead load deflections.

1. Steel used in the fabrication of the joists, design and working stresses and fabrication and

erection procedure shall conform to the requirements of the Steel Joist Institutes, unless otherwise specified.

2. Joists shall be fabricated from new materials. 3. Steel bearing plates: ASTM A36.

B. Bridging: Bridging shall be type indicated on the drawings and shall be in accordance with the SJI

Specifications.

C. Accessories: Furnish fittings and framing for openings, anchors, joist extensions, ceiling extensions, all as required for a complete installation.

D. Shop Painting: Steel joists, bridging, anchors and other steel accessories shall be cleaned of all

rust and mill scale and given one coat of primer. Surfaces that are to be welded during erection shall, where practical, not receive the shop primer. Do not shop paint joists to receive fireproofing. Primer shall conform to the following:

Steel Structures Painting Council Specification 15-68T, Type 1, red oxide. Federal Specification TT-P-636, red oxide. Shop paint that meets or exceeds the minimum performance requirements of one of the above

listed specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all errors of fabrication and for the correct fitting of the joists in the field.

B. Connections: Joist members shall be joined by either resistance or arc welding in a manner that

will produce a finished connection of the strength required.

C. Holes: Holes shall not be made or enlarged by burning.

D. Joists with cracked or improper welds, or joists otherwise damaged so as to affect their structural properties, will not be allowed.

E. Bearing and Anchorage:

1. Bearing surfaces of the joist shall be in the same plane with full bearing on the supporting

wall or beam. 2. Provide for anchors as required and as indicated on the drawings.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

ISSUED FOR BID 05 2000

Page 3

F. Repair or replace damaged joists according to manufacturer's recommendations. Repair shall be made so that joists capacity is not reduced.

G. All joists shall be set at elevations and spacing shown on the approved shop drawings with end

supports, bridging and end anchorage as indicated on the design drawings. Fasten all joists in place prior to receiving construction loads.

H. Lower chords of joist shall be extended and attached on all column lines, as well as at first

adjacent joist on either side of column line, for structural rigidity after dead load has been applied, and at all cantilever beams or bracing of cantilever. Where contact ceiling occur directly below the joists, ceiling extension shall be provided or lower chord members extended.

I. Bridging:

1. Install all bridging and bridging anchors concurrently with joist erection before receiving

construction loads.

2. Bridging shall support the top chord against lateral movement and shall hold the steel joists in the place indicated.

3. Ends of bridging shall be bolted to walls or welded to beams according to manufacturer’s

recommendations.

J. Welding shall be executed in accordance with "Code for ARC and Gas Welding in Building Construction" of American Welding Society, as amended to date.

K. During the construction period, exercise care to avoid excessive concentrated loads. Distribute

loads so as not to exceed the carrying capacity of the steel.


A. A qualified independent testing agency, employed and paid by the Owner, will perform field quality control testing and report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

B. Testing and verification procedures will be required of high-strength bolted connections and field

welds. Follow RCSC specification procedures for field-bolted connection inspection and testing and AWS D1.1 procedures for field weld inspection and testing.

3.03 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged galvanized coating on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Surface Preparation: Prepare all surfaces in conformance with SSPC requirements or as required

by the primer manufacturer.

C. Clean, all shop-coated surfaces damaged from rust and mill scale, welding and abrasion. Clean all welds.

D. Apply same type of primer as used in the shop. Apply all the same mil thickness. Apply to all

cleaned areas.

E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

05 2000 ISSUED FOR BID

Page 4

END OF SECTION

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 1 of 6

Section 05 30 00

Metal Floor and Roof Deck

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: A. Furnishing of, and paying for, all labor, materials, services, appliances, and equipment

necessary for the execution, installation, and completion of all work specified herein. B. Work Included: 1. All steel floor deck complete with all accessories, including cover plates, cell closures,

flashings, closure plates, etc., as shown on drawings and/or required to complete this work.

2. All steel roof decking complete with all accessories, including cover plates, cell

closures, flashings, closure plates, etc., as shown on drawings and/or required to complete this work.

3. Bearing plates, closures, and support angles at columns, including exterior side of

exterior columns. 4. Openings smaller than 18" square within steel deck, including steel miscellaneous

framing for such openings, whether or not same is shown on the Contract Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Section 01 0100 - Summary of Work B. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel; structural supports, including framed openings larger

than 18". C. DIVISION 15 and 16; miscellaneous floor deck penetrations for piping, conduits, etc. 1.O3 REFERENCE STANDARDS: A. Steel Deck Institute (SDI) Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof

Decks, Publication No. 24, with the following included therein: 1. SDI Steel Roof Deck Specifications 2. Code of Recommended Standard Practice, Roof Deck Construction. 3. SDI Standard, Roof Deck Load Tables 4. SDI Diaphragm Design Manual, (roof deck only). 5. SDI Specifications and Commentaries for Composite Steel Floor Deck. B. American Welding Society (AWS) Welding Code D1.1.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 2 of 6

C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specifications for the Design of Cold-formed Steel

Structural Members. D. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualified manufacturers shall meet materials and installation requirements of these

specifications and shall have had satisfactory experience in the production of these types of roof deck.

B. Fabricator shall certify in writing that he has met the requirements of the SDI Steel Deck

Specifications as amended by this specification. C. Qualified Personnel: Mechanics, including erectors and welders, shall be experienced in floor and/or roof decking

erection. Quality welding processes and welding operators shall be in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures.

1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit shop drawings for review and approval. See Section 01 3000 - Submittals of this

Project Manual for submittal procedures. B. Provide decking plan, deck profile dimensions, anchorage details, supplementary supports,

projections, closure strips, openings and reinforcement, finishes, applicable details, and accessories.

C. Submit manufacturer's catalog, specifications, and installation instructions indicating all

physical properties and load tables for the type of decks and accessories to be used with the first submittal of shop drawings.

D. Manufacturer shall submit mill test reports of material for all deck furnished. E. Certification of compliance with above shall accompany the first shop drawing submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS (see SDI Design Manual): A. Metal for steel floor and roof deck units shall be cold-formed from steel conforming to ASTM

A611-79, Grade C, D, or E, or ASTM A446-76, Grade A, B, C, D, E, or F and having a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi or better. See Contract Drawings for details and general description in General Notes.

B. All steel deck and accessory items shall be galvanized conforming to ASTM A525-73, G60. C. Bearing plates and angles shall conform to ASTM A36. D. Shear connectors (composite beams) shall conform to AWS D1.1, Articles 4.23, 4.26, and

4.27.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 3 of 6

1. Headed stud type, ASTM A108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold-finished carbon steel with

dimensions complying with AISC specifications. E. Welding materials shall be applicable AWS D1.1 types required for materials to be welded. F. Metal closures shall be not less than 18-gauge. 2.02 DESIGN: A. See SDI Design Manual and AISI Specifications for the Design of Cold-formed Steel

Structural Members. B. Maximum live load deflection: Length (in inches)/360. C. Maximum allowable unit working stress under total load: 60% of specified minimum yield

point or 20 ksi maximum. D. Sufficient structural anchorage for structural diaphragm action to provide the lateral

resistance called for on the drawings. See SDI Diaphragm Design Manual, 1981. E. Anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading of 30 lbs. per sq.ft. for roof areas. See

SDI Steel roof Deck Specifications, Section 2.6. 2.03 FABRICATION: A. Fabricate deck units in lengths to span three [3] or more supports with flush, telescoped, or

nested two [2"] inch laps at ends of interlocking or nested side laps unless otherwise indicated.

B. Provide deck configurations complying with SDI Steel Roof Deck Specifications, of metal

thickness, depth, and width as shown on the drawings. C. Fabricate metal closure plates for closing deck to columns, angle beams, etc. of not less

than 18-gauge material, galvanized. Form to close deck flutes and lap on the deck approximately two [2"] inches minimum.

D. Fabricate metal closure strips for openings between decking and other construction of not

less than 0.045" minimum (18-gauge) sheet steel. Form to provide tightly fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes and sides of decking.

E. Deck types:

1. Composite Steel Deck: Fabricate deck units with integral embossing or raised

pattern to furnish mechanical bond with concrete slabs. Fabricate open-beam deck units with fluted section having interlocking side laps. a) 3 VLI 20 by Vulcraft or equal b) ASTM A653 Structural Quality with G60 galvanized coating c) Minimum yield stress of 40 ksi d) Thickness: 20 Gauge e) 3” depth with corrugations at 12” on center f) Section modulus not less than 0.553 inches cubed. g) At flammable Storage Room, deck must be shored midspan.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 4 of 6

2. Non-Composite Steel Floor Deck: Provide fluted sections of metal deck as permanent forms for reinforced concrete slabs. a) 1.0 C 24 by Vulcraft or equal b) ASTM A653 Structural Quality Grade E (80ksi) with G60 galvanized coating c) Thickness: 24 Gauge d) 1” depth with corrugations at 3.625” or 4” on center e) Section modulus not less than 0.098 inches cubed

3. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels without top flange stiffening grooves in conformance with DI Publication 28, “Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck.” a) 1.5 B 20 and 1.5 B 18 by Vulcraft or equal b) ASTM A653 Structural Quality with G60 galvanized coating c) Minimum yield stress of 33 ksi d) Thickness: 20 Gauge and 18 Gauge e) Type B “wide rib” 1.5” depth with corrugations at 6” on center f) Section modulus not less than:

a. 0.234 inches cubed for 20 Gauge b. 0.289 inches cubed for 18 Gauge

2.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Deliver materials at approximate schedule time for installation and in such manner as to

avoid possible material contamination and injury to coating so that steel deck, when received, can be installed immediately and roofed over properly.

B. Steel decking not promptly erected shall be stored off the ground with one end elevated for

drainage and shall be protected from the elements with a waterproof covering. When placing bundles of steel deck on the roof, care shall be taken to avoid overloading the supporting structural members.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which metal decking is to be installed and

notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. B. He shall not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a

manner acceptable to installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. See SDI Steel Roof Deck Specifications, Section 5, Erection, and SDI Specifications and

Commentaries for Composite Steel Floor Deck, Section 4. B. Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and

approved shop drawings and as specified herein. 1. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends

accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before fastening permanently. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 5 of 6

2. Place deck units on straight alignment for entire length of run of cells and with close

alignment between cells at ends of abutting units. 3. Place deck units flat and square and secure to adjacent framing without warp or

excessive deflection. 4. Coordinate work and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking

bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. 5. Do not use deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured. C. Fastening Deck Units: 1. Follow manufacturer's approved shop drawing requirements unless otherwise called

for on the Contract Drawings. 2. Fasten floor deck units to steel supporting members by not less than 5/8" diameter

puddle welds or elongated welds of equal strength, spaced not more than 6" O.C. with a minimum of [2] welds per unit at each support. See SDI Specifications for Composite Steel Floor Deck, Section 4, "Attachments."

3. Tack weld or use #10 sheet metal screws at two [2'-0"] feet O.C. for fastening end

closures. 4. Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members by not less than 5/8” diameter

puddle welds or elongated welds of equal strength, spaced not more than 6" O.C. at supports and at closer spacing where required for lateral force resistance. See SDI Steel Roof Deck Specification, Section 2.6.

a. Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading of 30 lbs. per sq.

ft. for other roof areas. 5. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manually shielded metal arc

welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in corrected welding work. Use welding washers where recommended by deck manufacturer.

6. Lock side laps of adjacent deck units between supports at intervals not exceeding 18"

O.C. in full accord with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or

adjacent to the decking as shown. Close around all columns. E. Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength,

continuity of decking, and support of other work shown. F. Provide metal joint covers at abutting ends and changes in direction of floor deck units

except where taped joints are required. G. Weld shear connectors to supports through decking units in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Do not weld shear connectors through two [2] layers (lapped ends) of decking units. Weld only on clean, dry deck surfaces.

H. Cutting less than 16 square foot area openings through the deck and all skew cutting shall

be performed in the field.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 6 of 6

I. If the supporting members are not in alignment or at the proper level or location, correction as performed by others will be made upon notification by this Contractor.

J. Mechanical fastening shall be provided at all side laps with the spacing between side lap

fasteners and steel supports not exceeding two [2'-0"] feet. If an interlocking deck is used, fastening may be accomplished by crimping the interlock with button punch. Overlapping sheets require self-tapping screws no smaller than No. 10. Welding of side laps is not permitted.

K. This Contractor shall provide all holes and openings for stacks, pipes, sumps, drains,

ventilators, scuttles, skylights, and other projections through the deck as shown and located on the drawings. Openings shall be cut and fitted neatly and shall be reinforced as necessary for rigidity and load bearing capacity.

L. Drain hole accommodations in sump pans shall be field cut to each specific drain outlet size. 3.03 FIELD TOUCH UP PAINTING: A. After decking installation, wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots

on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Touch up painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces. In areas where shop-painted surfaces are to be exposed, apply touch up paint to blend into adjacent surfaces.

B. Field painting other than touch up painting shall be done under Section 09 9000 - Painting.

END OF SECTION

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 1

SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, galvanized or prime painted.

B. Ductile iron items.


A. Section 05 11 90 Structural Steel: Structural steel column anchor bolts.

B. Section 09 90 00 Painting: Paint finish.

1.03 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Section 03 30 10 – Concrete Work: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A14.3 Ladders, Fixed, Safety Requirements

B. ASTM A36 Structural Steel.

C. ASTM A53 Hot Dipped, Zinc coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe.

D. ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

E. ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

F. ASTM A283 Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars.

G. ASTM A500 Cold Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and

Shapes.

H. AWS A2.0 Standard Welding Symbols.

I. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code.

J. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) Steel Structures Painting Manual.

1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Section 01 30 00 Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and

type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where

applicable.

C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld

lengths.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 2

A. Prepare Shop Drawings by a firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those

indicated for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Welders Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00, certifying welders employed on

the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.


A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction,

verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop

drawings.

1.08 CORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates,

and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts and

items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such item to

Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed work, provide

materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting,

seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

2.02 MATERIALS – STEEL

A. Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Sections not otherwise specified: ASTM A36.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.

C. Plates: ASTM A283.

D. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B, Schedule 40

E. Fasteners: Galvanized.

F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 or A307; galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized

components.

G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

H. Ladders: ANSI A14.3.

I. Shop and Touch Up Primer: Alkyd red oxide primer with 44 percent solids by volume.

2.03 INTERIOR STEEL LADDERS - SHOP FABRICATED

A. All Structural Sections: ASTM A36 Structural Steel.

B. Design Load: 100 pounds/SF, applicable to all members and connections.

C. All Connections: Welded joints, continuous.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 3

D. All Weld Joints: Dressed to form smooth, flat surface.

E. Prime paint using specified primer.

F. Finish Coats: Job applied under Section 09900 - Painting.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS METAL - SHOP FABRICATED

A. Furnish and install all miscellaneous steel or decorative items as noted or detailed on the

Drawings.

B. All Steel not otherwise specified: ASTM A36

C. Ferrous Metal Items:

1. Interior: Shop primed with specified primer.

2. Exterior: Hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.

D. Ferrous and aluminum items shall not be in contact.

E. Bolts and anchors of a compatible or similar nature to the material anchored or supported shall be

used throughout.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.

D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight,

flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located;

consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.

F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related

components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

2.06 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.

B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.

C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.

D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.

E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.

2.07 FINISHES – STEEL

A. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC SP 2.

B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 4

C. Prime paint items with 1 coat.

D. Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123. Provide minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft

galvanized coating where indicated.

2.08 DOWNSPOUT SHOES - (RAINWATER LEADERS)

A. Manufacturers: Neenah Foundry Company. No Substitutions.

B. Type: R4925-R Type B, offset, 5x7. No substitutions. Where discharged into storm water system.

C. Size: Throat size as required to accommodate downspout plus approximately 1/4 inch clearance

all sides.

D. Height: 32 inches minimum. Actual height will vary according to stock dimensions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that structural supporting elements are completed and that dimensions correspond to the

manufactured product.

C. Check that embedded anchorage is complete.

D. Assure that fabricated items are within allowable tolerances.

E. Secure to structure following manufacturer's recommended procedures for pre-fabricated items.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.

B. Supply steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting

templates to appropriate sections.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until

completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

C. Field weld components indicated on Drawings or shop drawings.

D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.

F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except

surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

G. Touchup mars to match original finish.

3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch per story, non cumulative.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 5

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/8 inch.

C. Maximum Out of Position: 1/8 inch.

3.05 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS

Supply and install metal fabrications listed herein, complete with anchorage and attachments

necessary for installations.

A. Downspout Shoe

B. Steel Ladders

1. Provide and install steel ladders as detailed. Ship ladder(s) in prime coat, finish painting

shall be as specified in section 09900 - Painting.

C. Exterior Door Bumper Post

1. Provide and install 4”x4” steel tube, 6’-0” long at each exterior door leaf. Door Bumper by

Division 08 Hardware. Bumper post shall be positioned to allow door leaf to swing 110

degrees.

D. Cable Hook Assembly

1. Fabricate cable hook assembly from 2” wide x ¼” thick flat iron stock, as detailed on

drawings. Cable hooks shall be mounted on 4’-0” centers maximum. See electrical

drawings for location.

E. Steel angles, beams and miscellaneous iron not otherwise specified but shown on drawings shall

conform to ASTM A36.

1. Pipe hangar support angles are included.

2. Lintels at masonry wall penetrations

3. Roof opening angles over eighteen inches square.

END OF SECTION

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

ISSUED FOR BID 06 10 00 Page 1

SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Miscellaneous framing with dimension lumber.

2. Treated wood blocking and nailers, fire-retardant treated where required.

3. Wood furring.

4. Rough hardware, nails, bolts, washers, and other fastening devices.

5. Plywood backing panels for electrical/phone/data equipment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.

1. Include data for wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.

2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.

3. Power-driven fasteners.

4. Powder-actuated fasteners.

5. Expansion anchors.

D. LEED Submittals:

1. Certificates for Credit MR.6 and Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include documentation that manufacturer is

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

06 10 00 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Page 2

certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood sills, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Dricon; Hickson Corporation.

2. Pyro-Guard; Hoover Treated Wood Products.

3. Flameproof LHC-HTT; Osmose Wood Preserving Co.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood).

1. Use Interior Type A, for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

C. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Concealed blocking.

2. Framing for non-load-bearing partitions.

3. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, no limit for more than 2-inch nominal thickness.

B. Framing: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species:

1. Southern pine; SPIB.

2. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NELMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.

2. Nailers.

3. Furring.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

06 10 00 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Page 4

2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness.

2.7 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Framing Standard: Comply with American Forest and Paper Association’ (AF&PA) National Design Specification for Wood Construction "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC’s International Building Code.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

END OF SECTION 06 10 00

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 06 40 00 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide interior architectural woodwork complete as indicated on drawings, as specified, and as required for proper completion of the work.

1. Wood cabinetry and countertops.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

2. Division 9 Section “Painting” for field finishing of interior architectural wood work items that do not have plastic laminate finish.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. In addition to cabinetry, countertops, miscellaneous trim, and items indicated on drawings, interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size.

2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other items installed in architectural woodwork.

4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

06 40 00 ISSUED FOR BID Page 2

B. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Countertop materials.

2. Shop-applied transparent finishes.

3. Plastic laminate colors/patterns on actual material.

1.5 LEED SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates for Credit MR.6 and Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include documentation that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product.

B. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For particleboard, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.

C. Recycled Content of materials.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers and transparent-finished wood doors that are required to be of same species as woodwork.

C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, or specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for "Custom" grade of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Plain-sliced, Red Oak, or any closed-grain hard wood suitable for stain finish.

C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Southern pine, Eastern white pine, or western white pine.

D. Wood Products: Comply with the following:

1. Hardboard: AHAA135.4.

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.

3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.

4. Exposed Particle Board: #45 Premium Industrial Particleboard, glued with interior clue. Provide particleboard complying with ASTM E-84 Fire Test, Class C.

5. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following:

1. Formica Corporation.

2. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.

3. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. Provide soft-close hardware for cabinets and file drawers.

B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick metal, and as follows:

1. Semi-concealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter.

D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.

F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip.

G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091; integral style; full-extension type; epoxy-coated-steel with steel ball-bearings; of the following grades:

1. Box Drawer Slides: 100 lbf (440N).

H. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

I. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

J. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch (51-mm) OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SG series" by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors.

K. Cabinet Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips:

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.

2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.

E. Adhesive for Bonding Decorative Plastic Laminate and Bonding Edges: As recommended by manufacturer of plastic laminate.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.

B. Install laminated plastic in single pieces up to the limits of the sheet sizes; small patches will not be accepted.

C. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

2. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

F. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

G. Semi-exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber, same species indicated for exposed surfaces.

3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

H. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.

I. Provide hardware required for locking of all doors and drawers.

J. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.

2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETRY

A. Grade: Custom. Provide in specified styles and types, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay, except as otherwise indicated on Drawings.

C. AWI Construction Style: Style B, Face Frame.

D. AWI Construction Type: Type I, multiple self-supporting units rigidly joined together.

E. AWI Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay.

F. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements:

1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS nominal.050-inch thick.

2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS .nominal 029-inch thick.

H. Materials for Semi-Exposed Surfaces:

1. For semi-exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs Drawer Bottoms: Melamine on all visible surfaces with drawer in normal open position.

I. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL.

J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range of standard colors, patterns and finishes.

K. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.

2.6 SHOP FINISHING

A. General: The extent to which the final finish is applied at fabrication shop is Contractor's option, except shop apply at least the prime coat before delivery.

B. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, Custom Grade, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

C. Shop finish transparent finished interior architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finishing architectural woodwork.

D. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative overlay.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).

C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

E. Cabinets and Shelving: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets and shelving with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.

3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

F. Countertops: Anchor countertops securely.

1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

G. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide cold-applied, cutback asphalt dampproofing, as indicated on Drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product data.


A. Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to:

1. ChemMasters Corp.

2. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products

3. Gardner Gibson, Inc.

4. Henry Company

5. Karnak Corporation

6. Koppers, Inc.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


7. Malarkey Roofing Products.

8. W. R. Meadows, Inc.

9. Tamms Industries, Inc.

B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 4586, Type I, Class 1, fibered.

C. VOC Content: 2.5 lb/gal (300 g/l) or less.

2.2 PROTECTION COURSE

A. Refer to specification section "Building Insulation" for extruded-polystyrene insulation board "

B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by dampproofing manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated on Drawings, or required by field conditions.

B. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls as indicated on Drawings and where opposite side of wall faces building interior.

1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside face of footing.

2. Extend 12 inches (300 mm) onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed when Project is completed.

3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an 8-inch- (200-mm-) wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required.

4. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Cold-Applied, Cut-Back Asphalt Dampproofing:

1. On unparged concrete foundation and masonry foundation walls, apply primer and two brush or spray coats, or primer and one trowel coat.

D. Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. To ensure adhesion, install protection course within 24 hours of dampproofing installation, while coating is tacky. Support protection course with spot application of adhesive of type recommended protection board manufacturer for use over cured coating.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 1

SECTION 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to this sec-

tion.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide building insulation as specified, as indicated on Drawings and as required to

achieve indicated R-values and maintain the thermal continuity of the building envelope.

1. Foundation insulation.

2. Concealed building insulations.

3. Spray foam insulation.

B. Related Sections: Refer to Division 9 Section “Acoustical Insulation”.


A. Thermal Resistivity: Required R-values are for values determined at 75 deg F.

B. Fire-Test Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with fire-test

response characteristics determined by testing, using methods specified below, by UL or

other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Unless

noted otherwise, required fire performance characteristics apply to facings as well as base

insulation material.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84.

2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119.


A. Protect insulations from physical damage and deterioration, including loss of insulating or

other characteristics.

B. Protect insulations from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION

A. Thicknesses: Furnish insulation types and thicknesses indicated and as needed to provide

indicated R-values.

B. Foundation Insulation: Extruded polystyrene boards; ASTM C578, Type X, 15 psi mini-

mum compressive strength. At Contractor's option, Type IV extruded polystyrene boards

may be used instead of Type X. Provide products of the following manufacturers, or

equal.

1. Styrofoam Gray Board; Dow Chemical USA

2. Foamular 150; Owens-Corning

C. Batt Insulation: Mineral fibers with thermosetting resin binders; ASTM C665, Type I, Class

A blankets, as manufactured by Owens-Corning, Certainteed, Johns-Manville, or Knauf.

1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

2. Flame Spread: Maximum 25.

3. Smoke Developed: Maximum 50.

4. Unit Size: Use widths that fill framing spaces.

5. R-Value: Where indicated provide high performance R-21 un-faced, batt insula-

tion at other locations provide insulation to achieve indicated R-value.

D. Spray Foam Insulation: Self-expanding polyurethane or Icynene brand insulation for spray

application.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer, and con-

forming to requirements for fire-test response characteristics of insulation.

B. Crack Sealer: Type recommended by extruded polystyrene insulation manufacturer for

bonding edge joints and filling voids between units.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove projections and sharp edges that might puncture or tear insulation facings. Re-

move projections that interfere with placement of insulation.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 3

3.2 INSTALLATION – GENERAL

A. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not be exposed at any time to

ice and snow.

B. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated.

C. Cut and fit insulation closely to adjacent insulation units, surrounding construction, pene-

trations, and obstructions.

D. Apply insulation in single layer unless otherwise shown or acceptable to Architect.

E. Stuff tufts of un-faced batt insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavities as indicated or

as needed to complete thermal envelope. Compact insulation to approximately 40 percent

of normal volume.

F. Provide noncorrosive impaling pins, wires, or other mechanical anchorage or support as

needed to maintain insulation permanently in place. Where impaling pins are exposed to

human contact, provide protective caps.

3.3 FOUNDATION INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Apply at locations indicated on Drawings.

B. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive.

C. Set boards with edges of adjacent boards butted in full contact, and maximum 3/16 inch

joints at penetrations and perimeter.

D. Secure boards against displacement during backfilling and concrete placement.

E. Fill voids, cracks, and joints wider than 3/16 inch with crack sealer or with strips cut from

boards and wedged in place.

F. Protect foundation insulation from damage and displacement during backfilling and con-

crete placement.

3.4 BATT INSULATION IN WALLS

A. Set wall insulation in full contact with adjacent framing and furring strips. Provide adhesive

anchorage or impaling clips as needed to hold units in place until protective construction is

in place.

B. Friction fit batt insulation into framing spaces and tape facing flanges to framing.

3.5 SPRAY FOAM INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Apply spray foam insulation to following locations.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 4

1. Perimeter shim spaces of exterior opening frames.

2. Apply spray foam insulation at concealed locations as required to provide continui-

ty of thermal insulation coverage.

B. Trim insulation flush with adjacent surfaces as needed for installation of concealing con-

struction.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove misapplications, spills, and displacements of loose insulation from ventilation

spaces and other areas.

B. Remove misapplications and spills of adhesive from exposed surfaces.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from harmful weather exposures, from water absorption, and

from physical abuse.

B. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where installation of concealing work is de-

layed.

END OF SECTION 072100

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02

ISSUE FOR BID 07 26 16 Page 1

SECTION 07 26 16 BELOW GRADE VAPOR BARRIER

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements Sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide below grade vapor barrier as indicated on Drawings and as specified; including seam tape, pipe boots, detail strips and other accessories as required for proper installation.

B. RELATED SECTIONS

1. Division 3 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete”.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM E 1745-97 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs

2. ASTM E 154-88 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs

3. ASTM E 96-95 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

4. ASTM E 1643-98 Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

1. ACI 302.1R-96 Vapor Barrier Component (plastic membrane)

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s product data indicating compliance with ASTM and ACI Standards.

B. Manufacturer’s installation instruction.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Vapor Barrier/Retarder: Vapor Retarder membrane must have the following qualities

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Minimum Permeance ASTM E-96 0.04 Perms

2. Water Vapor Retarder ASTME-1745 Meets or exceeds Class A

B. Acceptable Manufacturers/Products: Stego Wrap (15 mil) Vapor Barrier by STEGO Industries LLC, San Juan Capistrano, CA is specified. Equivalent products of the following manufacturers' are acceptable.

1. Griffolyn T-85 by Reef Industries

2. W.R. Meadows “Perminator”

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Comply with manufacturer’s instruction and recommendations as relates to accessories required for proper installation.

B. Seam Tape: High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. Minimum width 4 inches.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that subsoil condition has been approved by Architect. Level and tamp or roll aggregate, sand or tamped earth base.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E 1643–98.

B. Unroll Vapor Barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour.

C. Lap Vapor Barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls.

D. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s tape.

E. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) with manufacturer’s pipe boot.

F. No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.

G. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 07 55 52 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide hot-applied modified bitumen system, complete with all components required for a watertight and weathertight installation including; but not limited to:

B. Roof insulation.

C. Cover Board

D. Modified bitumen roofing including cap sheet, interply, base sheet, and associated materials.

E. Base, wall and penetration flashings.

F. Roof cant strips, traffic pads, and miscellaneous materials.


A. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry”

B. Refer to Division 7 Section “Coping” edge trim/coping.

1.4 FACTORY MUTUAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Roof materials and installation shall be in strict accordance with minimum FM Global Class 1-60 guidelines as shown in Factory Mutual’s RoofNav and the latest issues of FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28, Wind Design, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29, Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Roof Components. The 6 ft. roof edges and corners shall comply with minimum FM Global Class I-90 and I120 guidelines or be otherwise reinforced in accordance with the referenced guidelines.

B. The roofing installer shall complete and submit to the Architect and the Owner’s Representative the FM Global Form X2688 “Checklist for Roofing System”.

1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


A. References in these specifications to standards, test methods, codes etc., are implied to mean the latest edition of each such standard adopted. The following is an abbreviated list of associations, institutions, and societies which may be used as references throughout these specifications.

B. American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE).

1. ASCE 7-Minimum Design Loads for buildings and Other Structures.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM); Philadelphia, PA (215) 299-5585

1. ASTM D 36-Soften Point of Bitumen (Ring and Ball Apparatus).

2. ASTM D 41-Asphalt Primmer Used in a Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing.

3. ASTM D 312-Asphalt Used in Roofing.

4. ASTM D 2178-Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.

5. ASTM D 2523-Testing Load-Strain Properties of Roofing Membranes.

6. ASTM D 2822-Asphalt Roof Cement.

7. ASTM D 5147-Testing Modified Bitumen Sheet Materials.

8. ASTM D 6162-Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous sheet Materials Using a Combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber Reinforcements.

9. ASTM D 6164-Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester Reinforcements.

D. FM Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Norwood, MA (617) 762-4300

E. International Building Code as published by the International Code Council.

F. NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association; Rosemont, IL (847) 299-9070

G. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration; Washington, DC (202) 523-1452

H. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. Chantilly, VA (703) 803-2980

I. UL Underwriters Laboratories; Northbrook, IL (708) 272-8800

J. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL): Fire Hazard Classification Rating.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Modified Bitumen Roofing Membrane: One ply cap sheet membrane, hot mopped to a modified bitumen inter-ply membrane hot mopped to a mechanically attached felt base sheet, cover board applied over rigid insulation, with flashings at all penetrations as well as wall and base flashing.

B. Base and Wall Flashing: Base and wall flashings shall be products of the same manufacturer as the modified bitumen cap sheet.

C. Roof Slope: As indicated on drawings.

D. Roof System Required R-Value: 20, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to roof installation, complete and submit for review and approval, to the Architect, the FM Global Form X2688 “Checklist for Roofing System”.

B. Product Data: Provide current standard printed product literature indicating characteristics of membrane materials, flashing materials, components, accessories, product specifications and installation instructions.

1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) product data.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit plans of roof showing pitches and locations of details. Submit custom details for every condition, including drains overflow and scuppers, surface mounted counter flashings, equipment base flashings, also showing attachment of extensions and flashings for pipes and vent stacks.

D. Manufacturer’s Certification, Bulk Bitumen: Submit manufacturer’s certification indicating that bulk bituminous materials delivered to project comply with required standards. Include quantity, statistical and descriptive data for each product. Submit certificate with each load before it is used.

1. Include continuous log showing time and temperature for each load of bulk bitumen, indicating date obtained from manufacturer, where held and how transported prior to final heating and application to roof.

E. Field Test Reports: Submit daily softening point test reports on samples of asphalt used on project, taken at beginning of each day’s work and at 2-hour intervals during course of the work thereafter. Test by Ring and ball Test, ASTM D 36, or similar recognized test method. Submit samples to independent laboratory for testing or perform tests in field, at contractor’s option.

F. Samples:

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Submit 12 inch by twelve 12 inch samples of roofing membranes and accessories, with manufacturer's identification labels attached.

2. Submit representative samples of each type of fastener, insulation and roofing accessory with manufacturer’s identification labels attached.

G. Certificates:

1. Code Approvals: Submit written certification of compliance with applicable codes of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Certificate of Analysis: Submit manufacturer’s certificate of analysis for each production run of cap sheet. If a production run is longer than 24 hours, a new lot number shall be assigned and a new Certificate of Analysis shall be generated. Provide the following information on Certificate of Analysis:

(a) Length (in feet).

(b) Width (in inches).

(c) Thickness at Selvage (mils).

(d) Weight (lbs./roll).

(e) Selvage Width (inches).

(f) Low Temperature Flexibility (-25 deg. F.), ASTM D 5147 or D 2523.

(g) Granule Embedment (avg. grams loss/sample), ASTM D 5147.

(h) Tear Strength, ASTM D 5147.

(i) Ultimate Elongation (percent).

(j) Compound Stability (0 or 77 deg. F.), ASTM D 5147.

(k) Dimensional Stability (percent), ASTM D 5147.

(l) Tensile Strength, ASTM D 5147.

(m) SBS Polymer content percentage and dispersion rate of modified membrane

H. Application Manual: Submit manufacturer's application manual, which describes completely the preparation of surfaces and application of specified materials, including details to suit all conditions.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


I. Applicator’s Status: Submit manufacturer's written proof of approved applicators status, submitted by the Manufacturer’s Corporate Office.

J. Manufacturer’s Letter: Submit letter from the modified bitumen roofing manufacturer confirming the number of years it has directly manufactured the proposed primary roofing system under the trade name and/or trademarks as proposed.

K. Manufacturer’s History of Installations: Submit a list of 3 installations of the specified roofing system.

L. Material List: Submit a descriptive list of all component parts of the roofing systems that will be covered under warranty.

M. Base Sheet Fastening Patterns: Provide drawings of fastener patterns as required to resist specified negative wind pressures, signed and sealed by a registered engineer, licensed in the State of Tennessee.

N. Delivery Tickets: Provide Contractor and Architect with bills of lading for roofing system products, including bitumen, at time of delivery to the project site.

O. Roofing Manuals: Submit, in a three-ring binder, all roofing data, including manufacturer’s catalogs/manuals of materials and accessories used in the Project, including manufacturer’s recommendations.

P. Sample Warranty: Submit a specimen copy of the specified warranty, with a list of all components to be covered.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Provide primary products, including each type of roofing sheet, bitumen, flashings, vapor retarder (if any), and cap sheet produced by a single manufacturer. Provide secondary products only as recommended by manufacturer of primary products for use with roofing system specified. Manufacturers complying with the specified criteria shall also comply with the following:

1. Experience: Shall have been in the business of manufacturing Modified Bitumen roofing membrane systems for a minimum of 5 years.

2. History of Installations: Shall have installations of the specified roofing system for a minimum of 5 years.

3. Installer: Manufacturers shall have an on-going approved installer program.

4. Manufacturer’s Field Representative: Provide technical representatives (employees) to inspect the installation of the roofing systems as

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


necessary to assure installation is in accordance with warranty requirements.

(a) Provide written reports of observations and recommendations to the Architect or Engineer on a weekly basis.

B. Installer: The roofing and associated work shall be contracted to a single firm, called the “Installer” hereafter, specializing in the type of roofing required, so that there will be undivided responsibility for the performance of the work.

C. Installer’s Qualifications: A single installer shall perform the work of this Section; and shall be a firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in the installation of roofing systems specified in this section.

1. Installer Certification: Provide the Owner with written certification from the manufacturer of the roofing system certifying that the installer is approved by the manufacturer for installation of the specified roofing system. Provide a copy of the certification to the Owner prior to award of the contract.

2. Installer’s Field Supervision: Installer must maintain a full-time supervisor/ foreman on the job-site during times that the roofing work is in progress. Supervisor must have minimum of 5 years experience in roofing work specified in this section.

3. Provide a list of 5 completed projects.

4. The roofing superintendent shall take readings and temperature of asphalt at point of application.

D. UL Listing: Provide roofing systems and component materials that have been tested for application and slopes indicated and are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for Class A external fire exposure.

1. Provide roof covering materials bearing classification marking (UL) on bundle, package or container indicating that the materials have been produced under UL’s classification and follow-up services.

E. Testing Agency: The Owner at its option and expense, may select and employ an Independent Roofing Inspection Service specializing in non-destructive evaluations (NDE), for moisture detection purposes, before final acceptance of the roofing systems. Contractor shall be responsible for any repairs deemed necessary to insure any moisture intrusion into the system. Upon completion of any repairs, an additional NDE moisture test shall be to verify compliance. A failure or non-compliance will result in the Contractor being responsible for the cost of the second test plus the cost of additional testing and repairs necessary to insure against moisture intrusion.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


F. Code Compliance.

1. Building Code: The complete roofing system shall comply with all applicable requirements of required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Wind Resistance: Execute the installation of the roofing system (including insulation and flashings) to comply with wind resistance requirements of applicable building codes for specific negative wind pressures at various building elevations (heights) as indicated on the Drawings.

1.9 PRE-INSTALLATI0N MEETING

A. Pre-Installation meeting shall not occur without shop drawings, manufacturers data and manufacturers written instructions and recommendations approved by the Contractor and submitted to the Architect..

B. Schedule: Convene the Pre-Installation Meeting a minimum of two weeks before starting work of this section.

C. Required Attendees:

1. Contractor.

2. Roofing subcontractor.

3. Roof System Manufacturer.

4. Installers of deck or substrate construction to receive roofing work.

5. Installers of roof-top units and other work in and around roofing that must precede or follow roofing work (including mechanical work if any).

6. Any other subcontractors associated with roofing work.

7. Architect.

8. Owner’s Project Manager, or authorized representative.

9. Owner’s property staff person who will be responsible for roofing maintenance.

D. The Contractor shall make arrangements for the meeting and notify the parties required to attend.

E. Agenda shall include:

1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2. Review roof system requirements (drawings, specifications, and other contract documents).

3. Review Shop Drawings and associated submittals.

4. Review manufacturer's technical materials.

5. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability of materials, personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

6. Review required inspection, testing, certifying and material usage accounting procedures.

7. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions, including temporary roofing.

8. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks), inspect and discuss condition of the substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver roofing materials and accessories in manufacturer's original protective containers with labels intact and legible. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for storage and handling.

1. Each pallet, container, or unit shall have the material manufacturer’s name and brand designation clearly listed.

B. Store materials in dry protected areas, on clean, raised platforms with securely anchored weather protective covering.

1. Store rolled goods on a clean, flat, dry and elevated surface.

2. Store material on the roof overnight only for use first thing the next day. Such materials shall be stored on pallets.

3. Rolls shall be stored on ends on pallets.

4. Store materials on roof in a manner to prevent overloading of deck.

5. Store flammable materials away from open flames, sparks or excessive heat.

6. Cover all materials with polyethylene or other waterproof plastic coverings.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Handle all materials in a manner to prevent damage and contamination with moisture or foreign matter. Handle rolled goods to prevent damage to edges or ends.

D. Damaged Materials: Immediately mark with an “X” of yellow spray paint and remove and replace damaged or improperly stored materials from project site.

E. Store and handle roofing sheets in a manner that will insure that there is no possibility of moisture pick-up. Store in a dry, well ventilated, weather-tight place, or store properly protected from weather or other moisture sources by leak-proof coverings and/or manufacturer’s original un-opened containers. Do not leave unused felt on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress without proper weather-tight protection.

F. Handle and store materials or equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent deflection of deck. The installer is responsible for any structural damage occurring due to the storage of materials or equipment on the roof.

G. All materials shall be stored in locked, watertight trailers or in watertight coverings on roof.


A. Do not permit traffic or material storage on completed roof surfaces.

1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and warranty requirements.

B. Suspend all application and installation activities during inclement weather. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions comply with manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not exceed temperature limitations recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Protect adjacent building surfaces against damage and bitumen spillage.

D. Night Seals/Water Cut Offs: Protect roof deck and insulation from moisture by providing water cut-offs at the end of each day's work or when the weather is threatening. Failure to protect the deck insulation and roofing from moisture will require the removal of damaged materials or materials containing excessive moisture. Remove water cut-offs prior to start of new work.

1. Mop in two-ply sheets.

2. Do not allow any voids in felt or bitumen.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3. Extend roofing plies at least 12 inches onto prepared area of adjacent roofing. Embed plies into asphalt or adhesive. Strip edges with 12 inch wide ply sheet embedded completely in alternate courses of asphalt.

E. Water Infiltration: If water infiltrates under or between the roofing plies or insulation during the installation of the roofing system, remove and replace that portion of the roof, including wet insulation.

1.13 SEQUENCING

A. Sequence installation of modified bitumen roofing with related units of work specified in other sections to ensure that roof assemblies, including roof insulation, flashing, trim, accessories, and joint sealers, are protected against damage from effects of weather, corrosion, and adjacent construction activity.

1.14 SPECIAL WARRANTIES

A. Total System Warranty by Manufacturer: Provide manufacturer’s Non-Pro Rated 20-year written full warranty, NDL (No Dollar Limit), in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. The warranty shall be a term type, with no conditions, exclusions, including exclusions of remedies by the Owner, deductibles or limitations on coverage amount. Any conditions, exclusions, or limits proposed by the manufacturer must be approved by the Project Consultant and Owner in writing, prior to starting the roof system installation.

1. Roofing System includes, but is not limited to: Roofing membranes (base, inter, and cap plies as applicable), roof insulation, fasteners, cover and deck boards, accessories, flashing and sheet metal, grounds/nailers, gutters and downspouts, scuttles and vents, curbs, and other components of roofing system.

B. Total System Warranty by General Contractor: Provide a minimum 5-year warranty, agreeing to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship with the specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. The warranty shall be a term type, with no conditions, exclusions, exclusions of remedies by the Owner, deductibles or limitations on coverage amount. Any proposed conditions, exclusions, or limits must be approved by the Project Consultant and Owner in writing, prior to the start of roofing system installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

1. Certainteed Commercial Roofing

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


750 E. Swedesford Road Valley Forge, PA 19482 1-800-359-7298 x 3441

2. GAF

1361 Alps Road Wayne, NJ 07470 1-800-766-3411

3. Johns Manville Roofing Systems

717 17th Street Denver, CO 80202 800-341-8032

4. Soprema Roofing Systems

310 Quadral Dr. Wadsworth, Oh 800-356-3521 330-334-0066 Firestone

Lunday & Associates, Inc. P.O. Box 95 717 E. Center Street

Sheridan, AR 72150 (888) 942-1463

2.2 MODIFIED BITUMEN CAP AND INTERPLY SHEETS

A. Certainteed System GMS-C-B3, complying with FM Global RoofNav Assembly Number 177080-48958-0 is specified. Subject to compliance with specified requirements and Factory Mutual approval, equivalent products of manufacturers listed in Article 2.1. are acceptable.

B. Base Sheet: FlexiGlass FR Base, Non-oxidized (flux) asphalt, blended with a compatible elastomeric styrene-butadiene-styrene polymer and selected inert fillers.

1. Support Mat: Wet process fiber glass mat

2. Surfacing: Mineral release agent

3. Dimensions: 39 - 3/8" x 98' 9" (324 square feet)

4. Thickness: 1.2mm (48 mils)

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Modified Bitumen Interply Sheet: Flintglas Ply Sheet, Type 4, or equal complying with ASTM D 2178, Grade IV, UL Type- G1.

1. Polymer Modifier: SBS (Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene).

2. Reinforcement: Polyester Mat.

3. Surfacing: Sanded.

4. Thickness. 0.6 mm (24 mils)

D. Cap Sheet: Flintlastic GMS, or equal complying with ASTM D 6164, Grade G, Type 1.

1. Application: Hot Asphalt Mopped.

2. Polymer Modifier: SBS (Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene).

3. Reinforcement: Fiberglass or Polyester.

4. Color: White

5. Thickness: 4.0 mm (160 mils)

E. Base and Wall Flashing Material: 2-ply flashing consisting of one smooth ply and one granular ply, use same material as interply and cap ply membranes.

2.3 BITUMENOUS MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.

B. Hot Asphalt (for installation of modified bitumen interply sheet, and the modified bitumen cap sheet): Comply with ASTM D 312, Type IV, unless otherwise recommended by roofing manufacturer for slope indicated.

1. Types of Asphalt:

2. For asphalt bitumen, provide label on each container or certification with each load of bulk bitumen, indicating flash point (FP), finished blowing temperature (FBT), softening point (SP) and equiviscious temperature (EVT).

C. Asphalt Roofing Mastic (for general use, except for contact with Modified Bitumen Membranes): ASTM D 2822, Type II.

2.4 ROOF INSULATION

A. Roof insulation shall be Factory Mutual and UL approved. All panels must possess adequate rigidity to span the flute openings of metal roof decks.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Insulation shall be approved in writing by the insulation manufacturer for intended use and for use with the specified roof assembly. Maintain a maximum panel size of 4 feet by 4 feet where insulation is specified to be installed in hot asphalt.

B. Type: Closed cell, rigid polyisocyanurate foam core material, integrally laminated between glass fiber facers, in full compliance with ASTM C 1289, Type II. Acceptable products are as follows:

1. Provide tapered units where required to achieve indicated roof slope.

2.5 COVER BOARD

A. Cover Board: Georgia-Pacific Dens Deck Prime water resistant gypsum cover board, or acceptable equal.

1. Thickness: Minimum ¼ inch thick, unless otherwise recommended by the roofing system manufacturer for compliance with warranty and Factory Mutual requirements.

2.6 VAPOR BARRIER

A. Where vapor barrier is indicated, or required by project conditions, provide vapor barrier approved by the roofing system manufacturer. The barrier shall in no way negate the system warranty. Provide manufacturer’s recommended primer.


A. Liquid Applied Reinforced Flashing Systems: Manufacturer’s liquid-applied, reinforced flashing systems should be installed where conditions are not favorable to install SBS modified bitumen flashings. Such conditions may include irregular shapes penetrating roof surfaces, confined areas and low flashing heights.

1. Where recommended by roofing system manufacturer and required to meet requirements for roof warranty, provide liquid applied flashing systems in lieu of pitch pans and lead pipe flashings.

B. Prefabricated Cants: Use metal unless otherwise approved in writing by Owner. Refer to Section 07600-Flashing and Sheet Metal.

C. Roofing Membrane Sealants: Compatible with cap sheet adhesive and furnished by modified bitumen membrane manufacturer.

D. Ceramic Granules: Provide of same composition, size, and color as the modified bitumen cap sheet membrane. Broadcast into bitumen overruns.

E. Lead Drain Flashings: 36 inch by 36 inch, formable type, 4 pounds per square foot.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


F. Blocking and Grounds:

1. Use metal unless otherwise approved in writing by Owner (refer to Section 07600-Flashing and Sheet Metal).

G. Substrate Joint Tape: 6 inch or 8 inch wide coated rag mat.

H. Traffic Pads: Cap sheet membrane manufacturer’s standard factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip resistant, surface-textured pads or rolls, .080 inches thick minimum, 28 inches wide minimum. Color shall slightly contrasting with the roof cap sheet for visibility.

2.8 FASTENERS

A. Provide fasteners and plates of type, size, and spacing pattern that are approved by the manufacturer of the modified bitumen roofing system, and in compliance with requirements of Factory Mutual.

1. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion resistant steel fasteners, washers, and plates.

2. Do not use mechanical fasteners to attach roofing membranes, except for attachment of base sheet to lightweight insulating concrete, and base and wall flashings.

B. Base and Wall Flashing Attachment: Flashing plies shall be adhesive attached and mechanically fastened with fasteners approved by the manufacturer and in compliance with requirements of Factory Mutual.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION OF SURFACES

A. Verify decks and insulation are dry and free of moisture of any form.

1. Verify proper placement of roof drains and other penetrations.

2. Verify proper securement of penetrating or roof mounted equipment.

B. Inspect roof perimeters, edges, penetrations and transitions to vertical surfaces to ensure that blocking or grounds have been installed where appropriate and have been secured to comply with design up-lift pressures.

3.2 ASPHALT

A. Provide kettle or tanker with clearly visible operating thermometer.

B. Do not heat asphalt above flash point and EVT recommendations.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Bitumen Consistency: Cutting or alterations of bitumen, primer, and sealants shall not be permitted.

D. Application of asphalt: Uniformly apply applications without voids as recommended by roofing manufacturer.

E. Types of Asphalt: Refer to 2.4-Bituminous Materials above.

3.3 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

A. Sweep all surfaces prior to commencement of roofing. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for preparation of substrates to receive roofing. Prior to priming, clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing work.

B. Metal: Metal surfaces shall be smooth and free of sharp edges and rough welds and shall be free of moisture, rust, dirt, and other foreign materials.

C. Priming: Prime both sides of metal flanges (all jacks, prefabricated flashing devices, edge metal, lead drain flashings, etc.) and concrete, masonry, and wood surfaces with a uniform coating of specified primer 24 hours prior to use.

3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install roof installation in accordance with roofing system manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations and NRCA recommendations.

3.5 CANT STRIPS

A. Install cant strips at transitions of roof membrane with flat vertical surfaces.

3.6 ROOFING APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. All layers of roofing shall be laid free of wrinkles, creases, or fishmouths. Sufficient pressure shall be exerted on the roll during application by “brooming” to ensure prevention of air pockets. Lap seams in the interply layers shall be staggered with the lap seams of the cap sheet.

1. All layers of roof shall be laid perpendicular to the slope of the deck.

B. Asphalt bitumen Heating: Heat and apply bitumen in accordance with equivicous temperature method (EVT Method) as recommended by the NRCA. Do not raise the temperature above the minimum normal fluid-holding temperature necessary to attain EVT (+25 deg. F or 14 deg C, at point of application) more than one hour prior to time of application. Discard bitumen held at a temperature exceeding finished blowing temperature (FBT) for a period exceeding 3 hours. Determine flash point, finished blowing temperature and EVT for bitumen, either by suitable,

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


and determine maximum fire-safe handling temperature and do not exceed temperature higher than 25 deg. F. (14 deg. C.) below flash point.

C. Bitumen Mopping Weights: For interply mopping and for other moppings except otherwise recommended by manufacturer, apply bitumen at the rate of 25lbs. of asphalt per roof square between piles (+ or – 25 percent on a total job average basis).

D. Substrate Joint Penetrations: Do not allow bitumen to penetrate substrate joints and enter building or damage insulation or other construction.

3.7 BASE SHEET

A. Install base sheet with specified fasteners in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions and as required in compliance with Factory Mutual requirements.

3.8 INTERPLY SHEET

A. Install interply sheet to base sheet in a full and uniform coating of asphalt in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions and as required in compliance with Factory Mutual requirements.

3.9 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE (CAP SHEET)

A. Granule Embedment: Install cap sheet membrane over interply sheet in a full and uniform coating of hot asphalt compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions and as required in compliance with Factory Mutual requirements.

B. Broadcast granules over all bitumen overruns on the cap sheet surface while bitumen is still hot.

3.10 WALL AND BASE FLASHINGS

A. Prime metal, concrete, masonry, and wood surfaces prior to flashing application at the minimum rate of 1 gallon per 100 square feet.

B. Securely adhere wall and base flashings with adhesive in compliance manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions and requirements of Factory Mutual.

C. All loose laps and edges shall be checked and sealed.

D. Base Flashings: Attach top edge of base flashing membrane with fasteners of type, size, and spacing in complying with manufacturer’s instruction and recommendations and requirements of Factory Mutual.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


E. Wall Flashings: The top edge of the wall flashing membrane shall be attached to substrate with termination bar of type, size, and fastener spacing complying with manufacturer’s recommendations and Factory Mutual requirements.

3.11 FLASHING AND STRIPPING

A. Provide manufacturer’s recommended SBS modified bitumen flashing at cant strips, other sloping and vertical surfaces, roof edges, and curbs through the roof. Provide one ply of manufacturer’s recommended SBS modified bitumen flashing. Nail or provide other forms of mechanical anchorage of flashing to vertical surfaces, as recommended by manufacturer or primary roofing materials. Modified bitumen flashing shall be granular surfaced (white).

B. Allow for expansion of running metal flashing and edge trim, which adjoins roofing. Do not seal or bond membrane or flashing and stripping to metal flanges over 3’-0” in length.

C. Penetration Flashing: Comply with roofing manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions for materials used and method of installation as required to suit field conditions and meet warranty requirements.

3.12 RELATED COMPONENTS-INSTALLATION

A. Refer to the appropriate specification section for roofing components integrated into the roofing membrane assembly.

B. Sealant: All modified bitumen cap sheet edges exposed at edge metal, equipment supports, and items penetrating roof shall be caulked with a smooth continuous bead of sealant approved by roofing manufacturer and compatible with substrates being sealed.

3.13 ROOF DRAIN INSTALLATIONS

A. Prime drain flashing and allow to cure prior to installation.

B. Adjust and secure new roof drains directly to roof decks with appropriate deck clamps.

C. Install specified insulation at drains to form uniform sumps as indicated.

D. Extend membranes and flashings under the clamping ring.

E. Secure clamping rings using bolts supplied by drain manufacturer.

F. Trim edges of membrane at the inside of drains.

G. Connect roof drains to existing drain lines.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3.14 TRAFFIC PAD INSTALLATION

A. Install traffic pad products in locations indicated. Unless otherwise indicated; place continuous around all roof equipment, fans, etc., continuous from point of roof access to roof equipment, fans, etc. Adhere or hot air-weld walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.

B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

C. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

3.16 JOB COMPLETION

A. Inspect completed roofing and correct all defects to meet the specification requirements.

B. Manufacturer's representative shall inspect the completed roofing system and notify the Architect of defects, if any, in the application.

3.17 CLEANING

A. Remove debris and clean roof deck and site on a daily basis and legally dispose at an approved disposal site.

B. Clean any drippage or spills of asphalt or primers as work progresses. Remove drippings from all walls, windows, floors, ladders and finished surfaces

C. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other sources of soiling caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning instructions and conform to their instructions.

D. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by the work of this Section.

3.18 TESTING

A. Unless this requirements is specifically waived by the Owner, test the modified bitumen roof as follows:

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Plug roof drains.

2. Flood the roof to a minimum depth of 2 inches above the drain clamp ring. Do not exceed a height of 2 inches below the top of any affected flashings, including walls, curbs, vents, stacks and other items penetrating the roof.

3. Water shall remain for a period of two (2) hours.

4. Each roof drain shall be allowed to drain its area. Drain areas one at a time until the entire roof is trained.

B. In addition to the installer, the test shall be conducted in the presence of the General Contractor, Manufacturer’s Representative, Owner’s Representative and the Architect. The Manufacturer’s Representative shall submit a written report that the roof drained properly and no leaking occurred as a result of this testing.

C. Should improper drainage or leakage occur the corrections to the roof membrane shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions and as required to comply with the manufacturer’s requirements for warranty.

3.19 PROTECTION

A. Restrict construction traffic and equipment movement on the completed roofing to only essential personnel. Provide appropriate protection against traffic and construction activities on completed roofs.

END OF SECTION

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING AND FIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide fire resistive joint systems and firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, as specified, as indicated on drawings, and as required for proper completion of the Work.


1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive-rated joint sealants.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire walls, fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke barriers.

2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479:

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with ratings indicated, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:

a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.

b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction.

1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.

2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

E. Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed.

1. Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings of construction that they join, and with movement capabilities and L-ratings indicated as determined by UL 2079.

2. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: For joints between edges of fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls, provide systems of type and with ratings indicated below and those indicated at the end of Part 3, as determined by NFPA 285 and UL 2079.

a. UL-Listed, Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: Integrity ratings equaling or exceeding fire-resistance ratings of floor or floor/ceiling assembly forming one side of joint.

b. OPL-Listed, Perimeter Fire-Barrier Systems: F-ratings equaling or exceeding fire-resistance ratings of floor or floor/ceiling assembly forming one side of joint.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Include printed statement of VOC content.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ4: For penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Service “Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers”.

B. Shop Drawings: For each firestop and fire-resistive joint system, show each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each firestop and fire-resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items.

2. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

C. Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration firestop system, along with the following information:

1. Types of penetrating items.

2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.

3. Firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Product Certificates: Firestop and fire-resistive joint system products, signed by product manufacturer.

F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that firestop and fire-resistive joint system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing firestop and fire-resistive joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain firestop systems fire-resistive joints system, for each kind of construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint systems tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, OPL, ITS, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop and fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Through-penetration firestop and fire-resistive joint systems products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Through-penetration firestop and fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspection agency:


A. Deliver through-penetration firestop and fire-resistive joint systems products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials in a manner that prevents their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop and fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that firestop and fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop and fire-resistive joint systems.

C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.

D. Do not cover up firestop and fire-resistive joint systems installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers providing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to:

1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.

2. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.

3. Hilti, Inc.

4. Nelson Firestop Products.

5. RectorSeal Corporation (The).

6. Specified Technologies Inc.

7. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.

8. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.

9. United States Gypsum Company

2.2 FIRESTOPPING

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation.

b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.

c. Fire-rated form board.

d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials.

3. Substrate primers.

4. Collars.

5. Steel sleeves.

C. Fill Materials

1. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated at the Schedule at the end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," or "cavity" materials.

2. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic, or plastic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

3. Intumescent Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture.

4. Firestop Collars: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

5. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.

6. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


7. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with backing on one side.

8. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

9. Pillows/Bags/Blocks: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives.

10. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone or latex liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

11. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:

a. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

b. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces.

c. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces.

2.3 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency.

C. Provide systems meeting rating requirements of building element in which they are installed.

2.4 FIRE SAFING INSULATION

A. Manufacturer/Product: U. S. Gypsum minimum 4” thick Thermafiber Safing Insulation, or equal.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Fire Resistant Sealant: Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing (3M) “Fire Barrier Caulk CPCP-25WB.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately before installing firestop and fire-resistive joint systems to comply with system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening and joints substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.

2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by firestop and fire-resistive joint systems manufacturers using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestop and fire-resistive joint systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop and fire-resistive joint systems seal with substrates.

3.3 FIRESTOP AND FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

A. Mixing: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

C. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of systems.

D. Install fill materials for systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION OF FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

A. Identify firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.

3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

4. Date of installation.

5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.

6. Installer's name.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop and fire-resistive joint systems manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.6 FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, provide systems using the following materials:

A. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items: Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

1. Intumescent latex sealant.

2. Silicone sealant.

3. Intumescent putty.

4. Mortar.

B. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:




4. Mortar.

5. Cast-in-place device.

C. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing: Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:




01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


4. Intumescent wrap strips.

5. Firestop collar.

6. Cast-in-place device.

D. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables: Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:




4. Silicone foam.

5. Pillows/bags.

E. Firestop Systems for Cable Trays: Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:



3. Silicone foam.

4. Pillows/bags/blocks.

5. Mortar.

F. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes: Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:



3. Silicone foam.


G. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants: Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

1. Latex sealant.

2. Silicone sealant


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


4. Mortar.

H. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants: Type of Fill Materials: One or both of the following:

1. Latex sealant.

2. Silicone sealant

3. Mortar.

I. Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrants: Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

1. Latex sealant.

2. Mortar.


4. Intumescent composite sheet.

5. Pillows/bags/blocks


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Completely close with sealant all joints as required to maintain the building in a weathertight and watertight condition and as required to close joints between adjoining materials. Include joints around frames of doors, windows, or other openings in exterior walls, flooring joints, joints at penetrations of walls, and floors by piping and other services and equipment, joints between items of equipment and other construction.


1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets.

2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.

3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission.


A. Provide sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

B. Product Data: Provide product data for sealants and sealant primers, including printed statement of VOC content.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.

2. When joint substrates are wet.

B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Products named in the Sealant Schedule establish quality standard. Subject to compliance with requirements, products, and applicability of the following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Dow-Corning

2. Tremco

3. Pecora

4. Bostik Construction Products

5. Sika

6. Sonneborn

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 DFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturer's full range of standard colors.

2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, closed-cell material with a surface skin in size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following:

a. Concrete.

b. Masonry.

c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

a. Metal.

b. Glass.

c. Porcelain enamel.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications,

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


and conditions indicated.

D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints.

F. Install sealants by proven techniques and at the same time backings are installed:

G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3.6 SEALANT SCHEDULE

SEALANT TYPE

PRODUCT/MANUFACTURER

USE

Acrylic Emulsion Sealant

"Chem-Calk 600" Bostik Construction Products Division "AC-20" Pecora Corporation "Sonolac" Sonneborn "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834" Tremco Inc.

Interior joints in field painted vertical and overhead surfaces including, but not limited to, metal doors frames, concrete, masonry, and other joints not indicated otherwise.

Silicone Sealant Dow Corning 790 Building Sealant, in color selected by Architect. Joint pri-mer: Provide as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

Use for exterior work, seal joints complete-ly around louvers, exterior door frames, windows, control joints and other exterior openings not provided for otherwise and all wall control joints, both exterior and interior.

One-Part Mildew Resistant Silicone

Self-Leveling Sili-cone Sealant

"Dow Corning 786

Dow Corning Corporation

"GE Silicone 1700 Sanitary

Sonneborn

Omniplus"

Dow SL traffic sealant.

Use silicone sealant at floor and wall perim-eter of all plumbing fixtures. Around fittings and accessories, caulk behind flanges and fittings in a fashion that the wall openings are sealed, but no sealant is exposed.

Use silicone sealant at surfaces similar to glass, glazed tile, plastics, and joint subject to moisture and humidity.

Horizontal joints in hard tile and concrete surfaces,


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 08 11 00 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements sections apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide metal doors and frames as indicated on Drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the Work, including frames for framed window openings and solid core wood doors.


1. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in steel frames.

2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weather stripping.

3. Division 8 Sections “Glazing” and “Overhead Sectional Doors”.

4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot-grouting frames installed in steel-framed gypsum board partitions.

5. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting factory-primed doors and frames.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, and construction details.

1. For products having recycled content, include documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and pre-consumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles.

2. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections.

C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames.


A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 and A250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Fire Rated Assemblies:

1. Fabricate assemblies as tested and approved by Underwriters Laboratories or other nationally recognized testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80.

3. Provide doors tested in accordance with NFPA 252 or UL10B.

4. Identify each assembly with factory applied label indicating applicable fire rating.

C. Comply with ANSI/SDI 250 and SDI 107 for thickness of hardware reinforcing.


A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames.

B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work that are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed.

C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Avoid using non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Steel Doors and Frames

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


a. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company.

b. Copco Door Co.

c. Curries Company.

d. Kewanee Corporation.

e. Pioneer Industries Inc.

f. Republic Builders Products.

g. Steelcraft; a Division of Ingersoll-Rand.

h. Amweld Building Products, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness, mill phosphatized.

D. Anchor Bolts, Fasteners and Screws: Manufacturer's standard type, except cadmium or zinc plated finish. Stainless steel also acceptable.

E. Cement Grout: Portland cement, sand and water; with minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at seven days.

F. Bituminous Paint: Zero VOC Coal Tar Epoxy, Progress Epoxy Polymers, or equal.

2.3 DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated.

B. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSISDI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:

1. Grade and Model: Grade III, Extra Heavy-Duty, Model 2, 16 gauge minimum (Full Flush - Composite Construction).

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSIA250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:

1. Grade and Model: (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 3 (Seamless). ANSI/SDI-100 Grade III, (16 gauge), galvanized on all surfaces and insulated.

D. Cores:

1. Interior: Resin impregnated kraft paper honeycomb.

2. Exterior: Manufacturers standard insulated core.

3. Fire Rated Assemblies: Mineral fiberboard.

E. Temperature-Rise Limit: At. exit enclosures and exit passageways (stairways), provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 def F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

2.4 FRAMES

A. General: Provide welded steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Frames: 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick steel sheet.

C. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames.

D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M) may be used in place of steel sheet.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Frames: Provide welded frames at all areas. Exterior frames shall be hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A653/A653M, A 60 galvanizing coating.

C. Pairs of Doors: Pairs of labeled “fire-rated” doors shall have Z-astragal. Non-rated doors do not require astragal.

D. Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges.

E. Interior Door and Panel Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush units, from the following material cold-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated.

F. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying with SDI standards.

G. Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Square edge.

H. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

I. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

J. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts.

K. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A 250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.

1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.

L. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. Grind and dress exposed welds smooth.

2. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars.

M. Glass Molding and Stops:

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Provide doors containing vision lites with hollow metal moldings to secure the glazing. Fixed moldings shall be welded on the security side. Loose stops with butt corners shall be provided. Stops shall be either snap-on or screwed into place with cadmium or zinc coated countersunk screws.

N. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site.

O. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, comply with Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A244.1 for acceptance criteria.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated assemblies.

B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

1. In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. At fire rated masonry walls coat inside of frames with bituminous paint and fully grout.

2. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws.

3. For openings 90 inches (2286 mm) or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs.

C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


A. Prime-Coat Touch-p: Immediately after installation, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer.

B. Test doors for smooth operation. Adjust as required to achieve smooth operation.

C. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide solid core flush wood doors as indicated on drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the Work.

1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weather stripping.

2. Division 8 Section Metal Doors and Frames for door frames.

3. Division 8 Section “Glazing” for vision lites.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, and trim for openings.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.

2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.

C. Finish Samples: Submit full range of samples of stain finish for Architect’s selection.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.1-A "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 75-mm) span.

1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion:

a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Eggers Industries “Masterflush” is specified as quality standard. Subject to compliance with requirements, equivalent products by one of the following manufacturers are acceptable.

1. Flush Wood Doors

a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.

b. Graham

c. Marshfield

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Doors for Transparent Finish

1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces).

2. Species and Cut: Plain sliced, red oak, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

3. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


4. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building.

5. Utilize 5-ply or 7-ply construction.

2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS

A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1.

2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows:

a. 5-inch (125-mm) top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers.

b. 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

3. Provide doors with either glued-block or structural composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores at locations where exit devices are indicated.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.

B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated:

C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

D. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles.

1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails. Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames.

E. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with matching wood frame, except provide metal trim at fire rated doors.

2.5 SHOP PRIMING AND FIELD FINISH

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


A. Shop Priming: Shop seal faces and edge of doors, including cutouts, with stain other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

B. Field finish doors with stain color selected by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold.

2. Bevel doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 08 31 00 INTERIOR ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide wall and ceiling access doors and panels complete, as indicated on Drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the Work.

B. Related Section: Refer to Division 9 Section “Painting” for field painting over factory applied primer.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated. Include construction details relative to materials, individual components and profiles, finishes, and fire ratings (if required) for access doors and frames.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed equipment and building systems as required for maintenance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following;

1. Nystrom, Inc.

2. Meadowcraft, Inc.

3. Milcor Division; Inryco, Inc.

4. Karp Associates, Inc.

B. Location/Finish: Factory-primed.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, and surface defects; pickled and oiled; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified nominal thickness according to ASTM A 568/A 568M.

C. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.

2.3 FIRE-RATED ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Flush, Insulated, Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: UL 1-1/2 hour (B), except as otherwise required for wall construction fire rating.

2. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F (139 deg C) at the end of 30 minutes.

3. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch (0.9 mm).

4. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide, surface-mounted trim.

5. Hinges: Continuous piano hinge.

6. Automatic Closer: Spring type.

7. Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by key or screwdriver with interior release, except where cam lock is required for panel size.

B. Flush, Insulated, Fire-Rated Security Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet.

1. Locations: Gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Three-fourths hour.

3. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch (1.9 mm).

4. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with drywall bead.


6. Automatic Closer: Spring type.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


7. Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by key with interior release, except where cam lock is required for panel size.

2.5 NON- RATED - SELECT TRIMMED OR TRIMLESS

A. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim – Non-Rated: Fabricated from steel sheet.

1. Locations: Gypsum Board, ceramic tile, and other surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations.

2. Door: Minimum 14 gauge or heavier sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame.

3. Frame: Minimum 14 gauge, or heavier sheet metal with 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide, surface-mounted trim.


5. Latch: Screwdriver operated cam latch.

B. Recessed Access Doors and Trimless Frames – Non-Rated: Fabricated from steel sheet.

1. Locations: Gypsumboard and suspended Acoustical-tile ceiling surfaces.

2. Door: Minimum 18 (or 16) gauge sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed for gypsum board and acoustical-tile infill.

3. Frame: Minimum 18 (or 16) gauge steel, factory galvanized and primed, recessed and reinforced as with manufacturer’s standard hinges, with drywall bead for gypsum board surfaces and only frame edge exposed in acoustical ceiling surfaces.

4. Hinges: Spring-loaded concealed pin type.

5. Latch: Screwdriver-operated cam latch with plastic grommet for access through pan recess.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

B. Steel Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm) wide around perimeter of frame.

2. For trimless frames with drywall bead for installation in gypsum board assembly, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely attached to the perimeter of frames.

3. Provide mounting holes in frames to attach frames to metal or wood framing in stuccoand drywall construction and to attach masonry anchors in masonry construction. Furnish adjustable metal masonry anchors.

C. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.

2.5 STEEL FINISHES

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Surface Preparation: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications.

C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing access doors and frames. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent surfaces or recessed to receive finish material, as appropriate for surface in which access door is installed.


A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.


1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 08 32 30 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide overhead coiling fire doors complete, as specified, as indicated on Drawings and as required for proper completion of the Work.


1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying.

2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field-applied paint finish.

3. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators, and accessories; and disconnect switches and circuit breakers for powered operators.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. Provide roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions, and maintenance information. Include the following:

1. Setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for built-in or embedded anchor devices.

2. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.

3. Motors: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements; size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and coatings.

4. Fire-Release System: Information describing fire-release system, including testing and resetting instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's data sheets.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring and between components provided by door manufacturer and those provided by others.

C. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

1. Operation and maintenance manual.

2. Certificate Stating that installed materials comply with specifications and applicable codes and regulations of governing authorities.

1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02



A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an installer, with a minimum of five years experience, who is an authorized representative of the overhead fire door manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling fire door operators and controls through one source from a single manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Atlas Door Corp.; Div. of Clopay Building Products Co.

2. The Cookson Company.

3. Cornell Iron Works Inc.

4. Mahon Door Corp.

5. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc.

6. The Overhead Door Company

2.2 FIRE RATING

A. Rating: 3/4 hour when tested in accordance with applicable UL Standard.

2.3 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide un-insulated, overhead coiling fire door.

B. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of material thickness recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:

1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Structural-quality, cold-rolled galvanized steel sheets complying with ASTM A 653, with G90 (ASTM A 653M, with Z275) zinc coating.

a. Provide manufacturer's standard flat-profile slats.

b. Steel thickness: Minimum 22 gauge slats.

1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


c. Slat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on polyester powder coat finish in color selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard color range, minimum 2.5 mil cured film thickness.

C. Formed Steel shapes: Minimum 12 gage, in same finish as door slats.

D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles, or channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading.

E. Supports, and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard.

2.4 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Provide hood fabricated from minimum 24 gage galvanized steel. Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag.

B. Smoke Seals: Provide UL-listed and -tested smoke-seal perimeter gaskets.

2.5 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance fire door by means of adjustable-tension steel helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with required barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. (2.5 mm/m) of span under full load.

C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.

D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.

E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, finished to match door, fabricated from steel plate with permanently lubricated ball or roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end closures.

2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and

1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


provided by door manufacturer for door and operational life specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation.

B. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically engaging sprocket-chain operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor, without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level.

C. Automatic Activation shall be activated by central alarm system, local heat and smoke detectors, or power outage.

D. Fire door shall be fail-safe and close upon power failure.

E. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator.

F. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, electric motors, complying with NEMA MG 1, with overload protection, sized to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction, from any position, at not less than 2/3 fps (0.2 m/s) or more than 1 fps (0.3 m/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

1. Type: Polyphase, motor with voltage and horsepower as recommended by the fire door manufacturer.

2. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Coordinate wiring requirements and electric characteristics of motors with building electrical system.

4. Standard Installations: Provide open dripproof-type motor, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

G. Remote-Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, 3-button control station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."

H. Obstruction Detection Device: Provide each motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor able to protect full width of door opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.

1. Sensor Edge: Provide each motorized door with an automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.

a. Provide electrically actuated automatic bottom bar.

1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


I. Provide electric operators with ADA-compliant audible alarm and visual indicator lights.

J. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain hoist.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate door installation with electrical work performed by others.

B. Install door in compliance with NFPA 80 and UL 325.

C. General: Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified.


A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust fire door to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion.

B. Clean surfaces soiled by work in accordance with manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods.

C. Remove surplus materials and debris from the site.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup services and testing, and to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below:

1. Test and adjust controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

a. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm connected fire-release system. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.

b. Where required by authorities having jurisdiction arrange for authorized authority to witness and test.

2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, preventive maintenance, and procedures for testing and resetting release devices.

3. Review data in the maintenance manuals.

END OF SECTION

1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 08 33 13 OVERHEAD COILING COUNTER DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide overhead coiling counter doors complete, as specified, as indicated on Drawings and as required for proper completion of the Work.


1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. Provide roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions, and maintenance information. Include the following:

1. Setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for built-in or embedded anchor devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc.

2. Atlas Door Corp.; Div. of Clopay Building Products Co.

3. The Cookson Company.


5. Mahon Door Corp.

6. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc.

1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2.2 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling counter door curtain of interlocking slats, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of material thickness recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:

1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Structural-quality, cold-rolled galvanized steel sheets complying with ASTM A 653, with G90 (ASTM A 653M, with Z275) zinc coating.

a. Provide manufacturer's standard flat-profile slats.

B. Counter Door Endlocks: Manufacturer's standard locks on not less than alternate curtain slats

2.3 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head and act as weatherseal. Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag.

1. Shape: Square.

B. Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia: Provide welded assemblies of the following sheet metal:

1. Fabricate of not less than 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet, Type 300 series, complying with ASTM A 240 (ASTM A 240M) or ASTM A 666.

C. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

1. Cylinder lock coordinated with the Owner’s masterkey system.

2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

2.5 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS

A. Provide crank operator.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to Shop

1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter.

END OF SECTION

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 08 36 00 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements sections apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide steel sectional overhead doors as indicated on Drawings, as specified and as re-quired for proper completion of the work.


A. Division 26: Power and control wiring for motor-operated doors.


A. Supply each overhead coiling door as a complete system produced by one manufacturer, including hardware, accessories, and mounting and installation components.

B. Wind Loading Performance for Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding 20 psf (85 mph) wind loading pressure without failure, including permanent deformation and reduction of weatherstripping effectiveness.

C. Air Infiltration: Maximum 0.08 cfm at 15 mph when tested per ASTM E283.

1.5 SUBMITTALS - ACTION

A. Product Data: Each type of sectional overhead door; include information on hardware and finishes.

1. Motors: Show nameplate data and ratings, characteristics, and mounting ar-rangements.

B. Shop Drawings: Each type and size of sectional overhead door. Show dimensions, hard-ware locations, anchorage details, and glazing.

1. Include summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.

C. Samples for Selection and Verification: Submit samples of finish and glazing for Archi-tect’s verification.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1.6 SUBMITTALS – CLOSEOUT

A. Submit operating instructions and maintenance information Include wiring diagrams for in-stallation of electrically operated units.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and ap-proved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional overhead doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Obtain operators and controls from the door manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components: Listed and labeled by UL or other testing agency acceptable to au-thorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING

A. Protect doors from damage during delivery, storage and installation.

B. Maintain factory-applied finish protection intact.

1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Pre-Installation Conference: Convene a pre-installation conference just prior to com-mencement of field operations, to establish procedures to maintain optimum working con-ditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Products of Overhead Door Corporation are designated to indicate de-sired performance, quality level, and appearance. Subject to compliance with require-ments, products of the following manufacturers will be acceptable.

1. Clopay Building Products Company.

2. Cookson


4. Wayne-Dalton

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2.2 INSULATED SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS

A. Door Assembly: Metal/foam/metal sandwich panel construction, with PVC thermal break and weather-tight ship-lap design meeting joints.

1. Panel Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm).

2. Exterior Surface: Flush, textured.

3. Exterior Steel: 20 gauge, galvanized.

4. End Stiles: 16 gauge with thermal break.

5. Spring Counterbalance: Sized to weight of the door, with a helically wound, oil tempered torsion spring mounted on a steel shaft; cable drum of die-cast aluminum with high strength galvanized aircraft cable. Sized with a minimum 7 to 1 safety factor.

a. High cycle spring: 50,000 cycles.

6. Insulation: CFC-free and HCFC-free polyurethane, fully encapsulated.

7. Thermal Values: R-value of 17.40; U-value of 0.057.

8. Air Infiltration: 0.08 cfm at 15 mph; 0.08 cfm at 25 mph.

9. Sound Transmission: Class 26.

10. Full Glazed Aluminum Sash Panels: 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) Low E Insulated glazing.

Finish and Color: Minimum two coat baked-on polyester:

a. Exterior: As selected by Architect.

b. Interior: White

2.3 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES

A. Tracks: Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type, size, and performance requirements.

1. Base Material: Galvanized steel; ASTM A653/A 653M for minimum G60 (Z180) zinc coating.

B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: As recommended by Manufacturer for Project applica-tions to anchor, reinforce, and support tracks to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Base Material: Galvanized conforming to ASTM A36/A 36M and ASTM A123/A 123M.

C. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gas-kets of flexible rubber or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of overhead door.

1. Provide motor-operated doors with combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge.

2. Provide continuous flexible seals at door jambs for weathertight installation.

2.4 HARDWARE

A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stain-less-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.

B. Hinges: Heavy-duty galvanized steel hinges at each end and intermediate stile.

C. Rollers: Heavy-duty case-hardened steel rollers with steel ball bearings in case-hardened steel races.

D. Lock: Keyed lock with interlock switch for automatic operator.

2.5 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM

A. Counterbalance Mechanism: Torsion spring on cross head shaft with galvanized aircraft type steel lift cables; springs rated for minimum 50,000 cycles.

1. Provide tamperproof cycle counter.

B. Cable Safety Device: Include spring-loaded steel or bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side that automatically stops door if either cable breaks.

C. Brackets: Provide anchor support brackets to connect stationary end of spring to wall, to level shaft, and to prevent sag.

D. Provide spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening opera-tion.

E. Manual Operation: Chain hoist with maximum 25 lb effort; mechanism that permits door curtain to be easily stopped at any point in its travel and to remain in position until move-ment is reactivated.

1. Manual operation is for use only when electric power operation is not functioning.

2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS

A. General: At a minimum, provide Overhead Door Company Model RHX, heavy duty opera-tor, 60 hertz 3 h.p. Provide electric door operator components of size and capacity rec-

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


ommended and provided by door manufacturer for specified door size and operation-cycle requirements

B. Disconnect Device: Hand-operated disconnect device or mechanism for automatically en-gaging chain-and-sprocket operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Provide interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

C. Provide control equipment conforming to NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, AC or DC.

D. Electric Motors: High-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, elec-tric motors conforming to NEMA MG 1, with overload protection, sized to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at not less than 2/3 fps and not more than 1 fps, without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

1. Type: Poly-phase, medium-induction type.

2. Service Factor: NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide open drip-proof-type motor, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 en-closure.

4. Electrical Characteristics: 480 Volts, 3 phase.

E. Wall-Mounted Control Stations: Provide one station each for all overhead coiling doors ad-jacent to door on interior side. Verify

1. Function: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button con-trols labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."

2. Type: Interior units, full-guarded, surface mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6 enclosures.

3. Trim Plates: Stainless steel.

F. Safety Edge: Electro-mechanical type; full width along bottom edge; wired to stop and re-verse door operation upon contacting obstructions.

G. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatical-ly stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.

H. Provide electric operators with ADA-compliant audible alarm and visual indicator lights.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until openings have been properly prepared.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Verify wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within specified limits.

C. Verify electric power is available and of correct characteristics.

D. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install overhead doors and track in accordance with approved shop drawings and the manufacturer’s printed instructions.

B. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow for maintenance.

C. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.

D. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members only.

E. Fit and align door assembly including hardware.

F. Set doors with panels plumb and parallel to plane of wall.

G. Anchor door track and operating equipment rigidly and securely to structure without distor-tion.

H. Space vertical track supports maximum 24 inches apart.

I. Hang horizontal and sloped track from structural overhead framing with angle or channel hangers fastened to framing by welding or bolting or both.

J. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement for door track and operating equipment to prevent movement during door operation.

K. Place fasteners and anchorage devices so they are not accessible from the exterior when door is in closed position.

L. Mount disconnect device and operator to be accessible from floor level.

M. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control wiring from dis-connect to unit components.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts.

B. Adjust hardware for smooth, quiet operation, and secure locking.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Adjust weatherstripping to provide continuous closure and uniform moderate pressure when door is closed.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove labels and visible markings; except code required labels.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Startup Services: Engage factory-authorized service representative to perform startup ser-vices and to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below:

1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning con-trols and equipment.

2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, preventive maintenance, and procedures for testing and resetting release devices.

3. Review data in the maintenance manuals.

4. Schedule training with Owner. Provide at least 7 days' advance notice.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 – General Requirements sections apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

B. Provide aluminum entrances framing, complete, as indicated on Drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the Work.

C. Related sections include the following:

1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants installed as part of aluminum entrance and framing systems.

2. Division 8 Section "Glazing."


A. General: Provide aluminum entrance systems capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated, without failure, based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this project. Failure includes framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by structural movement.

B. Glazing: Physically isolate glazing from framing members.

C. Wind Loads: Provide entrance systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-load design pressures calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," 6.4.2, "Analytical Procedure," whichever are more stringent.

1. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is smaller, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Structural Silicone Sealant Joints: Provide systems with structural silicone-sealant joints complying with the following requirements:

1. Static-Pressure Test Performance: Provide entrance systems that do not evidence material failures, structural distress, failure of operating components to function normally, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330.

a. Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load design pressures.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


b. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile (1.609 km) of wind for relevant exposure category.

E. Dead Loads: Provide entrance system members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load.

1. Provide a minimum 1/8-inch (1.59-mm) clearance between members and top of glazing or other fixed part immediately below.

2. Provide a minimum of 1/16 inch (1.59 mm) clearance between members and operable doors.

F. Live Loads: Provide entrance systems complete, including anchorage, that accommodate the supporting structures' deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation.

G. Air Infiltration: Provide entrance systems with permanent resistance to air leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s/sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75.2 Pa).

H. Water Penetration: Provide entrance systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting wind-load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (299 Pa). Water leakage is defined as follows:

I. Thermal Movements: Provide entrance systems, including anchorage, that accommodate thermal movements of systems and supporting elements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses on glazing, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, failure of doors or other operating units to function properly, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

J. Structural-Support Movement: Provide entrance systems that accommodate structural movements including, but not limited to, sway and deflection.

K. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide entrance systems that accommodate dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product specified. Include details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For entrance systems. Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, joinery, anchorage, glazing and provisions for expansion and contraction, and attachments to other work.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Samples: Submit samples of specified finish and color for Architects verification. If color is not specified, submit manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Installer Certificate: Certificate signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing entrance systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.

B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of entrance systems that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

2. Adhesive sealant failures.

3. Cohesive sealant failures.

4. Failure of system to meet performance requirements.

5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

6. Failure of operating components to function normally.

7. Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas.

C. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02



A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating systems without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS/SYSTEMS

A. Kawneer 350, medium stile doors are specified, equivalent products of the following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. CMI Architectural Products Inc.

2. Efco Corporation

3. Tubelite Architectural Systems.

4. YKK AP America

B. Dimensions:

1. Vertical Stile: 3-1/2" (89 mm)

2. Top Rail: 3-1/2" (89 mm) 6-1/2" (166 mm)

3. Bottom Rail: 10"

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with the requirements of standards indicated below.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).

2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.

4. Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M).

5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Complying with ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) for structural shapes, plates, and

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


bars; ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A 570 (ASTM A 570M) for hot-rolled sheet and strip.

C. Glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard pressure-glazing system of black, resilient glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers, fabricated from an elastomer of type and in hardness recommended by system and gasket manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements. Provide gasket assemblies that have corners sealed with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer's standard permanent, nonmigrating types in hardness recommended by manufacturer, compatible with sealants, and suitable for system performance requirements.

F. Framing system gaskets, sealants, and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

G. Sealants and joint fillers for joints at perimeter of entrance systems as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

H. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.3 COMPONENTS

A. Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard thickness for specified door model, with extruded tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie-rods.

1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Provide manufacturer's standard snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing stops and preformed gaskets.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets and reinforcements that are compatible with adjacent materials. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads.

2. Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware application. For hardware application, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws finished to match framing members or hardware being fastened, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials, and of type recommended by manufacturer.

F. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weather stripping as follows:

1. Compression Weather Stripping: Molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 requirements or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287 requirements.

2.4 HARDWARE.

A. General: Provide heavy-duty hardware units indicated in sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for entrances indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Closers, General: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for closer size, depending on door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use.

1. Closing Cycle: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," whichever are more stringent.

2. Opening Force: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements for locations indicated:

a. Exterior Doors: Maximum 15 lbf (67 N).

3. Concealed Overhead Closers: ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 2. Provide cover and the following:

C. Lever Handles: Manufacturer's standard cast-aluminum-alloy, inside-lever, deadlatch operating unit. Provide units for push and pull applications.

D. Locket Set Faceplates: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum faceplate for lock type indicated that lays flush with door stile.

E. Flat Face Strikes: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel, flat face strike with steel mounting plate and black-plastic dustbox.

F. Radius Face Strikes: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel, radiused face strike with steel mounting plate and black-plastic dustbox.

G. Door Stops: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor- or wall-mounted door stop, as appropriate for door location indicated, with integral rubber bumper.

H. Cylinders: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

I. Mortise Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard 6-pin mortise cylinders for installation in exit devices complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 requirements.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


J. Pull and Pull Handles: As selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturer's full range of lever pull handles and plates. One per door leaf on the pull side. US 32D Stainless Steel

K. Exit Device: Paneline EL or equal, concealed rode exit device for electrified access control. Provide matching panels, not equipment for electric control, at fixed side lites.

L. Thresholds: At exterior doors, provide manufacturer's standard threshold with cutouts coordinated for operating hardware, with anchors and jamb clips, and not more than 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) high, with beveled edges providing a floor level change with a slope of not more than 1:2, and in the following material:

1. Material: Aluminum, mill finish.

M. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard weather sweep for application to exterior door bottoms and with concealed fasteners on mounting strips.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

1. Fabricate components for head- and sill-receptor frame construction with shear-block construction at intermediate horizontal components.

B. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before finishing.

C. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.

D. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior.

E. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. Weld before finishing components to greatest extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

F. Glazing Channels: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to FGMA's "Glazing Manual."

G. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

H. Entrances: Fabricate door framing in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads. Factory assemble door and frame units and factory install hardware to greatest extent

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


possible. Reinforce door and frame units as required for installing hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before finishing components.

1. Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. Provide doors finished in clear or anodic color as selected by Architect.

D. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-MC10C21A41 Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.7 mils or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of entrance systems. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing entrance systems. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.

B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight construction, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


E. Install entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Install surface-mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

F. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing," unless otherwise indicated.

G. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," unless otherwise indicated.

H. Erection Tolerances: Install entrance systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances:

1. Variation from Plane: Limit variation from plane or location shown to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.

2. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm).


A. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and weather stripping, smooth operation, and weathertight closure.

B. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds, and dirt from surfaces.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Owner, manufacturer and Installer, that ensures entrance systems are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide glass and glazing complete, as indicated on drawings and as required for proper completion of the Work.

1. Windows

2. Doors.

3. Glazed entrances.

4. Borrow lites.


A. Division 7 "Joint Sealants"

B. Division 8 Section "Toilet Accessories" for mirrors.

C. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Window System"

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

C. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated and specified.

B. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations as used on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening an location.

C. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples for glass and of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

E. Installer Qualifications Data: List of Installers completed project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners.

F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that the following products comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Coated Glass: Obtain coated glass from one manufacturer for each type of coating and each type and class of float glass indicated.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


D. Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating-glass units from one manufacturer using the same type of glass and other components for each type of unit indicated.

E. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

F. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design Guide."

2. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines."

H. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and testing agency:

1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.

2. Associated Laboratories, Inc.

3. National Accreditation and Management Institute.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

1.10 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Coated-Glass Products: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select)

2.2 ANNEALED FLOAT GLASS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select)

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, including matching glass tint, products of one of the following are acceptable:

1. Guardian Industries

2. PPG Industries

3. Pilkington Glass Limited

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2.3 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS

A. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class, kind, and condition as

1. Provide Kind: HS (heat-strengthened) coated float glass in place of coated annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Provide FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated.

2.4 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article.

1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. Provide FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated, required by governing codes and regulations.

B. Sealing System: Manufacturer’s standard dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants.

C. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. Metal or silicone foam spacers are acceptable at glass edges.

E. Insulating Glass (IG) Where insulating glass is indicated, provide coated insulating glass units complying with the following:

1. Product/Manufacturer: 1” (25 mm) thick insulated glass consisting of 1/4 inch Viracon, clear glass with Low E Coating on #2 surface, and ½ hermetically sealed, argon filled air space, and ¼ inch thick inner clear glass on inner lite.

2. Products of other glass manufacturers are acceptable subject to complying with specified requirements.

3. Inner Space: Air

4. Summer Time U-Value: 0.47

5. Winter U-Value: 49

6. Shading Coefficient: .23

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2.5 WIRED GLASS

A. Wire Glass: Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat) Class 1 (transparent), Quality 18 (glazing) complying with ANSI Z97.1; ¼” thick wire glass with m2 square mesh.

2.6 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:

1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic.

B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant in the Glazing Sealant. Refer to "Joint Sealant" section for products and manufacturers.

2.7 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.

2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2.8 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. Neoprene

2. EPDM

3. Silicone

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. Silicone foam spacers are acceptable.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep system.

3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as follows:

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


I. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

J. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

B. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

C. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

D. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

E. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

F. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (Dry)

A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3.6 SEALANT GLAZING

A. Sealant Glazing (Wet): Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.7 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide gypsum board assemblies complete, as indicated on Drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the Work.


1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation installed in gypsum board assemblies.

2. Division 9 Section “Tile” for cementitious backer boards.

3. Division 9 Section “Acoustical Insulation and Sealants”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory.”

2. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Steel Framing and Furring

a. Consolidated Systems, Inc.

b. Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor.

c. Dietrich Industries, Inc.

d. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind.

e. National Gypsum Company.

2. Gypsum Board and Related Products

a. American Gypsum Co.

b. G-P Gypsum Corp.

c. National Gypsum Company.

d. United States Gypsum Co.

3. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Georgia Pacific Densglass or equivalent, approved by installer and manufacturer of exterior insulation and finish system.

2.2 STEEL PARTITIONS

A. Components, General

1. Comply with specified requirements.

2. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0329 Inch.

2. Depth: As indicated.

C. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges.

D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).

E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange.

1. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-mm-) thick, galvanized steel.

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).

2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).

G. Sound Proofing Clips: Resilient sound proofing clips designed for use with steel framing.

H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange.

1. Depth: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm).

2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

J. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2.3 GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.

1. Regular Type

a. Thickness: 5/8 Inch (15.9 mm).

b. Long Edges: Tapered.

c. Location: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Type X

a. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).

b. Long Edges: Tapered.

c. Location: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. Moisture-Resistant

a. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9)

b. Long Edges: Tapered

c. Location: Walls in areas subject to moisture that are not indicated to receive tile backer board.

4. Abuse-Resistant and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: Gypsum abuse-resistant drywall panel enhanced with glass fibers and a high-density gypsum core; surfaced on the front, back and long edges with reinforced mold and mildew-resistant, heavy facing paper; and complying with ASTM C 1396 Section 5 and ASTM C 36, Type X.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes

a. Corner Bead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges.

d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use where indicated.

e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound; use where indicated.

f. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated.

g. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges.

h. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. Use where indicated.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.

B. Joint Tape

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum "Gypsum Construction Handbook."

C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

1. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly.

a. Use deep-leg deflection track where indicated.

b. Use proprietary deflection track where indicated.

c. Use proprietary firestop track where indicated.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.3 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITIONS

A. Install tracks (runners) at floors and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction.

1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install foam-gasket isolation strip between studs and wall.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.

C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.

1. Cut studs 1/2 inch (13 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief.

2. For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.

3. Where sound isolation is required install resilient sound isolation clips spaced minimum 48 o.c.

D. Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings:

1. Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

F. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint.

3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above.

G. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

3.4 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

F. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.

G. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduit.

3. Where partitions intersect open structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.

J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

K. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.

1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3.5 CONTROL JOINTS

Location Control Joint*

Where a partition, wall, or ceiling traverses a con-struction joint (expansion, seismic or building con-trol element) in the base building structure.

Provide control joint

Where wall or partition runs in uninterrupted straight plane

Provide joints at minimum 30' intervals

At door jamb, except where door jambs extends from floor to ceiling

Extend joint from door to ceiling

Control joints in interior ceilings with perimeter re-lief

Install control joint so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 50 ft and total area be-tween control joints does not exceed 2500 sq ft.

Where a control joint occurs in an acoustical or fire-rated system

Provided blocking behind the control joint by using a backing material such as 5/8 in. (15.9 mm) Type X gypsum board, mineral fiber, or equivalent meeting the approval of a nationally recognized testing agen-cy.

Control joints shall also be installed where specified by the architect or designer as a design accent or ar-chitectural feature.

*Install control joints according to ASTM C 840

3.6 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS

A. Single-Layer Application

1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3.7 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect/Engineer for visual effect.

3.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:

1. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Level 5 Finish: Provide level 5 skim coat finish at walls indicated to serve as projection screens and at walls where Level 4 finish does not result in a smooth, level finish free of indentations, and evidence of tape, or fasteners.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 09 31 00 TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide tile complete, as indicated on drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the Work.


1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Comply with applicable sections of ANSI A108, A118, A136, and A136 for tile installation and tile setting materials.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C136 – Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

2. C144 – Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

3. C150 – Portland Cement.

4. C627 – Robinson Floor Test for Tile Service Level.

5. C847 – Standard Specification for Metal Lath.

6. V1028 – Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.

C. TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation published by Tile Council of America, latest edition.


A. Absorption (ASTM C67): Not more than 12%.

B. Freeze Thaw Resistance (ASTM C67): Unaffected after 50 cycles.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Compressive Strength (ASTM C67): Not less than 4000 psi (27,560 kPa).

D. Bond Strength (ASTM C482): 50 psi (0.3 MPa).

E. Coefficient of Friction (ASTM C1028): 0.6 dry; 0.6 wet.

F. Breaking Load (ASTM C67): Minimum load 300 lbs.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required, at least 12 inches (300 mm) square and mounted on rigid panel. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed work.

2. Solid polymer thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths.

D. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, accessories and setting materials.


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or producer.

B. Tile shall be installed by Installer experienced in performing work of this section, who has specialized in installation of similar work to that required for this project for a minimum of 5 (five) years.

C. Work shall comply with requirements of regulatory agencies and authorities have jurisdiction.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install mortar, set grid and grout tile when surface temperature is a minimum of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and rising, but no greater than 90 degrees F (32 degrees C).

1.9 QUARRY TILE MOCK-UP

A. Install a minimum 4’ x 4’ mock at the project site, in the location designated by the Architect. Use specified products. After approve by the Architect, This mock-up will become the standard for tile installation.

B. Maintain the mock-up throughout the construction period for workmanship comparison.

C. Upon approval by the Owner the mock-up may be incorporated into final construction.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TILE MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS

A. Products of the following tile manufacturers will be acceptable, providing their products equal or exceed the quality of the specified products (see finish schedule) and the color match the colors specified as verified by the Architect.

1. American Olean

2. Daltile

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3. Crossville

4. Florida Tile

5. Equivalent products of other manufacturers will be considered.

B. Quarry Tile: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors and sizes.

1. Square-edged flat tile as follows: Internal corners and cove base.

2. Wearing Surface: Nonabrasive, smooth.

3. Facial Dimensions: 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm) or 8 x 8 inches as selected by the Architect. Verify Size for CD’s.

4. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).

5. Face: Plain.

6. Base and Trim: Provide matching trim shapes, such as bullnose corners, internal

corners, and cove base.

C. Ceramic Tile: Tile colors to be selected for 100% CD. All ceramic tile will be 2” x 2” with matching base and trim.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold.

B. Solid Polymer Thresholds: Made from homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6, without precoated finish.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Avonite, Inc.

b. DuPont Polymers.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


c. Formica Corporation.

d. Nevamar; International Paper; Decorative Products Division.

e. Swan Corporation (The).

f. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

2.3 WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANES

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10, selected from the following.

B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Product: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), and fabric reinforcement.

1. Products:

a. Custom Building Products; Trowel & Seal Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane.

b. LATICRETE International Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane.

c. MAPEI Corporation; PRP M19.

2.4 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Tile setting and grouting materials manufacturers:

1. Laticrete International, Inc.

2. American Olean.

3. Dal-Tile International.

4. Mapei Corporation.

5. TEC Incorporated.

6. Custom Building Products.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.

C. Setting Type: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.1A and as specified below.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15); or polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils (0.1 mm) thick.

2. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm) by 0.062-inch (1.57-mm) diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size.

3. Expanded Metal Lath: Diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847.

a. Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Uncoated or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into lath.

b. Base Metal and Finish for Exterior Applications: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.

c. Configuration over Solid Surfaces: Self-furring.

d. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. yd. (1.4 kg/sq. m)

4. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.

E. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1.

1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph C-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1.

F. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:

1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin liquid-latex additive.

a. For wall applications, provide non-sagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

G. For Quarry Tile - Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

H. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

I. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


J. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.

K. Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.

L. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated.

1. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.

2.5 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS

A. Provide cementitious backer units complying with ANSI A118.9 in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.

1. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

B. Products:

1. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990.

2. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.

3. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.

4. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications, stainless steel; ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.

C. Temporary Protective Coating: Product that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.

D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

E. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout.

1. Products:

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


a. Bonsal, W. R., Company; Grout Sealer.

b. Bostik; CeramaSeal Grout Sealer.

c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978.

d. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Grout and Tile Grout Sealer.

e. MAPEI Corporation; KER 003, Silicone Spray Sealer for Cementitious Tile Grout 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and Tile.

f. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer.

g. TEC Specialty Products Inc.; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone TA-257 Silicone Grout Sealer.

2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.

B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.

1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. Remove dirt and other materials that may impact tile adhesion.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:

1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.

2. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.

I. Cementitious Backer Boards: At showers, tubs, and where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated.

3.4 WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.

B. Install crack-suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.

C. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight.

3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. Refer to Installation Schedule at the end of this section for TCA setting method.

1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.

3.6 CERAMIC TILE FLOOR INSTALLATION

A. Ceramic Tile Floor Installation: For interior floor installations, comply with the following:

1. Installation Method:

a. Install tile materials in accordance with ANSI A137.1, other referenced ANSI and TCA specifications, and TCA “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation”, except for more stringent requirements of manufacturer or these specifications.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


b. Cut and fit tile tight to protrusions and vertical interruptions and treat with a compatible sealant as specified in Section 07900. Form corners and bases neatly.

c. Work tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joint watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or grout.

d. Prepare surface, fit, set, bond, grout and clean in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI standards and Tile Council of America.

2. Setting Bed and Grout: Comply with ANSI A108.5 for latex Portland cement grout.

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:

1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

2. Quarry Tile: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm), unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

C. Thresholds: Install thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.

D. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.

E. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards:

1. Tile floors in wet areas, including showers and tub enclosures.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove epoxy and latex-Portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.

B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.8 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Tile Installation FTI-1: Interior floor installation on concrete; cement mortar bed (thickset) with cleavage membrane; TCA F111 and ANSI A108.1A.

B. Tile Installation FTI-2: Interior floor installation on concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA F113 and ANSI A108.5.

C. Tile Installation FTI-3: Interior floor installation on waterproof crack-suppression membrane over concrete and wood; cement mortar bed (thickset); TCA F121 and ANSI A108.1.

D. Tile Installation FTI-4: Interior floor installation on waterproof crack-suppression membrane over concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA F122 and ANSI A108.5.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide Resilient Flooring as indicated on drawings, as specified, and as required for proper completion of the work. Replace tile damaged during demolition work required for this project.


1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tile.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. If tile color is not indicated, or specified, provide manufacturer’s full range of standard colors for Architect’s selection.

C. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.

E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS: RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

A. Armstrong product is specified as Basis-of-Design. Products of the following resilient floor tile manufactures will be acceptable, providing their products equal or exceed the quality of the specified tile and the color is acceptable to the Architect.

1. Azrock Commercial Flooring

2. Congoleum Corporation:

3. Tarkett

4. Mannington

2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE (VCT)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Armstrong “Excelon” __________ collection.

B. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F1066, Class 2 through pattern.

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm), unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. 50 g/L.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

3. Moisture Testing:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 TILE INSTALLATION

A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles (as recommended by manufacturer).

B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles (as recommended by manufacturer).

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings.

D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

F. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.

B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Unless otherwise approved by Owner, a minimum of three coats of polish is required. Where only a portion of flooring is removed and replaced with new tile, entire room shall be stripped and repolished.

3. Maintaining an acceptable gloss level by buffing, spray-buffing or burnishing. Allow adequate drying time after each coat. Do not buff, spray buff or burnish a floor with less than three polish.

a. Use commercially available product acceptable to tile manufacturer and Owner.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.

4. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion.

5. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 09 65 10 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide acoustical ceilings, complete as indicated on drawings, as specified, and as required for secure installation and proper completion of the work. Provide all components and accessories necessary for properly secured installation.

B. Refer to Division 26 Electrical for light fixtures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AC: Articulation Class.

B. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.

C. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including product test reports indicating compliance with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Ceiling suspension system members.

2. Method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure.

3. Ceiling mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinklers and special moldings at walls, column penetrations and other junctures of acoustical ceilings with adjoining construction.

4. Minimum Drawings Scale: 1/4inch - 1 foot (1:48)

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Tiles: 6-inch (150 mm) square sample of each acoustical tile type, pattern, and color.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2. Set of 12-inch long sample of exposed suspension members, including moldings, for each color and system type required.

D. Maintenance data for finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

E. Qualifications Data: Provide list of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architect, or Owner's Representatives.

F. Code Compliance: Provide evidence that ceiling components and installation comply with building code in effect for Project from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed ceilings similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics for Mineral Fiber Tiles: Provide tiles that comply with the following requirements:

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical tiles with the following surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:


A. Deliver ceiling tiles, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical mineral fiber tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle ceiling tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of suspension systems with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by ceiling components, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Mineral Fiber Ceiling Tiles: Full-size tiles equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.

2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products of the following manufactures will be acceptable, providing their products equal or exceed the quality of the specified products.

1. Armstrong: Products of Armstrong are listed to establish product characteristics and quality standard. In addition to Armstrong, equivalent products of the following manufacturers are acceptable.

a. USG.

b. BPB.

2.2 MINERAL FIBER TILES, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Antimicrobial Treatment for Mineral Fiber Tiles: Provide acoustical tiles treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial solution that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative.

2.3 TILE CEILING SYSTEMS: Refer to Schedule at the end of Part 3 of this section for type/size and suspension systems.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension System: Refer to Schedule at the end of Part 3 of this section for type/size.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.

C. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400.

3. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.

E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch- (1-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts.

G. Hold Down Clips for Non-Fire Resistance-Rated Ceilings: For interior ceilings consisting of acoustical ties weighing less than 1 lb/sq. ft. (4.88 kg/sq. m), provide hold-down clips spaced 24 inches (610 mm) on all cross tees.

2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

A. Products of the following manufacturers are acceptable subject to compliance with specified requirements:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. Celotex Corporation; Architectural Ceilings Marketing Dept.

3. USG Interiors, Inc.

4. Chicago Metallic

2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit tile edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. For lay-in tile with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of tile and flange at exposed suspension member.

2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

3. For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer's standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners.

2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer’s standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C834 and the following requirements:

1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:

a. PL Acoustical Sealant; ChemRex, Inc., Contech Brands.

b. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.

c. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co.

2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:

a. BA-98; Pecora Corp.

b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc.

c. OSI-Sealants, Inc.; SC-175.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which ceiling systems attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of ceiling systems.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of ceiling tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.


A. General: Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

1. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, space as recommended by tile manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

4. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

5. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


7. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.

10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical tiles with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut tiles at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

1. For reveal-edged tiles on suspension system runners, install tiles with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.

2. For reveal-edged tiles on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges, install tiles with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and tile faces flush with bottom face of runners.

3. Paint cut edges of tile remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed tile surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


4. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements, where indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of ceiling systems, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired and evidence of damage permanently eliminated.

3.5 CEILING SYSTEMS SCHEDULE

Acoustical Ceilings

System No. 1 - Acoustical Tile Lay-in Ceiling

Product 2195

Pattern "Cortega"

Size 24" x 24" x 5/8"

Edge Beveled, Tegular

Color White

Light Reflectance .82

NRC .55

Suspension System Prelude XL

System No. 2 – Acoustical Ceiling for Areas Subject to Moisture and Humidity

Product 607

Pattern Ceramaguard

Size 24” x 24” x 5/8

Color White

Edge Square


Sound Blocking CAC 38


System No. 3 - Acoustical Tile Ceiling System – Food Preparation Areas

Product Kitchen Zone 673

Pattern Non-Perforated

Size 24” x 24” x 5/8

Edge Square Lay-in

Color White


Sound Blocking (CAC) 33



01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide resilient wall base and accessories, as specified, as indicated on drawings, and as required for proper completion of the work.

B. Related Sections include the following: Refer to other Division 9 sections for resilient flooring of various types and carpeting.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide resilient accessories with a critical radiant flux classification of Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this section who has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color of product specified from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the work.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02



A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After post-installation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE

A. Products of the following resilient wall, base, and accessories. Manufacturers will be acceptable, providing their products equal or exceed the quality of the specified products (see Finish Schedule) and the color matches the colors specified as verified by the Architect.

1. Johnsonite.

2. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc.

B. Roppe Corporation

C. Standard Base: ASTM F1861; Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic); Group 1 (solid, homogeneous); coved or toeless style; 0.125 thick, smooth surface, in height indicated on drawings.

1. Provide coved base at resilient flooring and straight base at carpeted areas, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


D. Outside and Inside Corners: Premolded.

E. Colors and Patterns: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors

2.2 RUBBER STAIR TREADS AND RISERS

A. Product/Manufacturer: Products of R..C. Musson are specified. Equivalent products meeting specified requirements are acceptable.

B. Stair Treads: No. 626, minimum ¼ inch thick treads, in width required to fully cover stair tread.

C. Riser: No. 505 CR, minimum 1/8” thick coved riser to match tread.

D. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s standard colors.

2.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES

A. Description: Provide reducer strip for resilient floor covering, and joiner for tile and carpet where transitions occur.

B. Material: Rubber.

C. Profile and Dimensions: Where transitions occur select accessories meeting ADA requirements and submit for Architect's approval.

D. Submit proposed transition strip from artificial turf to resilient flooring for Architect's review and approval.

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturers for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.

b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

3. Moisture Testing:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION

A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.

E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces.

G. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Resilient Stair Accessories:

1. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece.

2. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint between units.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.

B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.


1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 09 67 23 TROWEL APPLIED FLOORING (TAF)

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to this section

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide epoxy based trowel applied flooring system (TAF) complete, including all components and accessories required for a complete and proper installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required.

B. Samples for Selection: Samples for Selection: Provide color samples of manufacturers full range of standard colors for Architect's selection. Vary texture on samples to show textures achieved by the use various amounts of quartz aggregate that are appropriate for this Project.

C. Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches (150 mm) square, applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project.

D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements.

E. Submit manufacturer’s written warranty.

F. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to be included in maintenance manuals.


A. No request for substitution shall be considered that would change the generic type of floor system specified (i.e. Epoxy mortar base with decorative broadcast quartz system). Equivalent materials of other manufactures may be substituted only on approval of Architect and Owner. Request for substitution will only be considered only if submitted 10 days prior to bid date. Request will be subject to specification requirements described in this section.

1. A sample warranty letter must be included with substitution requests.

1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who is experienced in applying resinous flooring systems similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance, and who is acceptable to resinous flooring manufacturer.

1. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated.

2. Contractor shall have completed at least 10 projects of similar size and complexity.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, through one source from a single manufacturer, with not less than ten years of successful experience in manufacturing and installing principal materials described in this section. Provide secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.

D. Manufacturer Field Technical Service Representatives: Resinous flooring manufacture shall retain the services of Field Technical Service Representatives who are trained specifically on installing the system to be used on the project.

1. Field Technical Services Representatives shall be employed by the system manufacture to assist in the quality assurance and quality control process of the installation and shall be available to perform field problem solving issues with the installer.

E. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Apply full-thickness mockups on 48-inch- (1200-mm-) square floor area selected by Architect.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

F. Pre-installation Conference:

1. General contractor shall arrange a meeting not less than thirty days prior to starting work. 2. Attendance:

a. General Contractor b. Architect/Owner's Representative. c. Manufacturer/Installer's Representative.


A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components.

1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Store materials to prevent deterioration from moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental effects.

C. All materials used shall be factory pre-weighed and pre-packaged in single, easy to manage batches to eliminate on site mixing errors. No on site weighing or volumetric measurements allowed.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application.

1. Maintain material and substrate temperature between 65 and 85 deg F (18 and 30 deg C) during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after application.

B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application.

C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after application, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.

D. Concrete substrate shall be properly cured for a minimum of 30 days. A vapor barrier must be present for concrete subfloors on or below grade. Otherwise, an osmotic pressure resistant grout must be installed prior to the resinous flooring

1.7 WARRANTIES

A. Joint Warranty: Manufacturer shall furnish a single, written warranty covering both material and workmanship for a period of (1) full years from date of installation, or provide a joint and several warranty signed on a single document by material manufacturer and applicator jointly and severally warranting the materials and workmanship for a period of (1) full year from date of installation.

B. Manufacturer’s Standard Warranty: In addition to the joint warranty provide manufacturer’s standard system warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESINOUS FLOORING

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, (Stonshield HRI; basis of design). Systems must comply with troweled epoxy mortar and decorative quartz broadcast. Build-up of multiple layers of broadcast and

1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


liquids will not be acceptable. Verify inclusion of mortar base and extra coat of polyurethane sealer.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements:

1. Stonhard, Inc.; Stonshield HRI®. Contact L. Chris Eicher 615.424.2224 or [email protected]

C. System Characteristics:

1. Color and Pattern: Color will be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors.

2. Wearing Surface: Medium; slip-resistant. 3. Overall System Thickness: 3/16”

D. System Components: Manufacturer's standard components that are compatible with each other and as follows:

1. Primer: a. Material Basis; Stonhard Standard primer b. Resin: Epoxy. c. Formulation Description: 2 component, 100 percent solids. d. Number of Coats: One.

2. Body Coat a. Material Basis: Stonshield HRI base b. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids, 3 component, trowel applied mortar

1) Thickness of Coats: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) 2) Number of Coats: One.

c. Aggregates: Pigmented, blended aggregates. 3. Undercoat:

a. Material Basis: Stonshield undercoat. b. Resin: Epoxy c. Formulation Description: 2 component 100% solids. d. Type: Clear. e. Finish: Gloss. f. Number of Coats: one.

4. Broadcast Media: a. Material Basis: Stonshield quartz aggregate b. Type: pigmented decorative quartz; pre-mixed at manufacturing facility. c. Finish: standard. d. Number of Coats: one. e. Pattern: Tweed.

5. Topcoat: a. Material Basis: Stonkote CE4. b. Resin: Epoxy c. Formulation Description: 2 component 100% solids. d. Type: Clear.

mailto:[email protected]

1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


e. Finish: Gloss. f. Number of Coats: one. g. Texture level: medium.

6. Sealer: a. Material Basis: Stonseal ST6. b. Resin: Aliphatic polyurethane/polyurea c. Formulation Description: 2 component high solids. d. Type: Clear. e. Finish: Gloss. f. Number of Coats: one.

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and body coats indicated. Formulation Description: Stonhard Standard Primer, 100% solids.

B. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.

C. Joint Sealant: Type recommended or produced by resinous flooring manufacturer for type of service and joint condition indicated. Allowances should be included for Stonflex MP7 joint fill material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, and neutral Ph substrate for resinous flooring application.

B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring.

1. Mechanically prepare substrates as follows:

a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.

b. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements, unless manufacturer's written instructions are more stringent.

2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations.

1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry.

a. Perform in situ probe test, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with application only after substrates do not exceed a maximum potential equilibrium relative humidity of 80 percent.

b. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 6 lb of water (3lbs when using waterproofing membrane)/1000 sq. ft. of slab in 24 hours.

c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing.

4. Verify that concrete substrates have neutral Ph and that resinous flooring will adhere to them. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing.

C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Allowances should be included for Stonflex MP7 joint fill material.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.

1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion.

2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, provide joint in resinous flooring to comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. a. Apply joint sealant to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Apply primer where required by resinous system, over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Body Coat: apply metal trowel single mortar coat in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or power trowel and grout to fill voids. When cured, remove any surface irregularities by lightly abrading and vacuuming the floor surface.

1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


D. Undercoat: Mix and apply undercoat with strict adherence to manufacturer's installation procedures and coverage rates.

E. Broadcast: Immediately broadcast quartz aggregate into the undercoat using manufacturer's specially designed spray-caster. Strict adherence to manufacturer's installation procedures and coverage rates is imperative.

F. Apply topcoat(s) in number of coats indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer.


A. Material Sampling: Owner may at any time and any numbers of times during resinous flooring application require material samples for testing for compliance with requirements.

1. Owner may engage an independent testing agency to take samples of materials being used. Material samples will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will test samples for compliance with requirements, using applicable referenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using testing procedures listed in manufacturer's product data.

3. If test results show applied materials do not comply with specified requirements, pay for testing, remove noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces coated with unacceptable materials, and reapply flooring materials to comply with requirements.

3.4 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND CURING

A. Cure resinous flooring materials in compliance with manufacturer's directions, taking care to prevent contamination during stages of application and prior to completion of curing process. Close area of application for a minimum of 18 hours.

B. Protect resinous flooring materials from damage and wear during construction operation. Where temporary covering is required for this purpose, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for protective materials and method of application. General Contractor is responsible for protection and cleaning of surfaces after final coats.

C. Cleaning: Remove temporary covering and clean resinous flooring just prior to final inspection. Use cleaning materials and procedures recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer

3.5 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Training: Provide on-site training for Owner’s maintenance personnel. Include recommended materials and methods.

1/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Maintenance Information: During training, provide written maintenance instructions and recommendations. Provide additional copies for inclusion in project closeout documents.

END OF SECTION

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 09 82 00 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION AND SEALANTS

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 – General Requirements apply to this sec-tion.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide blanket acoustical insulation and acoustical sealant as required to minimize noise transmission between certain rooms, as indicated on Drawings, as specified and as re-quired for proper completion of the Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS – ACTION

A. Product Data:

1. Blanket acoustical insulation.

2. Acoustical sealants.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Verification of surface burning characteristics by testing per ASTM E84 by UL or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Resistance Rated Construction: Provide materials and installation identical to those of referenced assemblies tested per ASTM E119 by fire testing laboratories acceptable to governing authorities.

1. UL Design Numbers: Assemblies listed in UL “Fire Resistance Directory”.


A. Store insulation materials off ground in dry location, and protect against moisture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BATT ACOUSTICAL INSULATION

A. Sound Attenuation Insulation: Mineral fiber insulation manufactured specifically for use in acoustically-rated and fire-resistance rated assemblies and conforming to ASTM C665, Type I.

B. Partitions:

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Sizes: Where installed in framing cavities, provide units that are at least 1 inch wider than stud spacing dimension.

2. Product: United States Gypsum Co.; Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Fire Blan-kets; minimum 3-inch thickness unless noted otherwise.

C. Ceilings: Unfaced batts; minimum 4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL SEALS

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, la-tex sealant conforming to ASTM C834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmis-sion through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90.

1. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.

2. United States Gypsum Co.; Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant.

B. Electrical Box Seals: Self-adhesive resilient pad air seals manufactured for this purpose. The following products are acceptable:

1. Lowery’s Outlet Box Pads.

2. 3M Putty Pads

3. Kinetics Seal Tite.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that rough plumbing, electrical, telephone and data utilities are in place, have been inspected by authorities having jurisdiction, and are ready to be permanently concealed.

B. Verify that backing plates, blocking, and penetrations are complete and are ready to be permanently concealed.

3.2 BATT ACOUSTICAL INSULATION

A. Install acoustical insulation before gypsum board.

B. Partitions: Fill framing spaces for complete coverage and to achieve indicated STC ratings.

1. Install batts with friction fit against all sides.

2. Fit insulation tight around cut openings and penetrations, and behind and around electrical and mechanical items within framing spaces.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3. Permanently secure insulation against settlement and other displacement. Provide mechanical supports as needed to supplement friction and compression of batts to prevent displacement.

C. Suspended Ceilings: At rooms requiring acoustical insulation, install batt insulation above the lay-in ceiling, around the entire perimeter of the room. Lay batts in straight, parallel rows that are in full contact with each other and with perimeter walls.

1. Do not cover recessed luminaires.

3.3 ACOUSTICAL SEALS

A. Where acoustical insulation is installed in partition, seal the assemblies at perimeters, con-trol and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with continuous beads of acoustical sealant beads at both faces of partition.

1. Comply with ASTM C919 and manufacturer recommendations for location of acoustical sealant beads, and close off sound-flanking paths around or through the work, including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings and ceiling around electrical boxes.

2. Where concealed acoustical sealant beads are required at floor line, apply sealant to clean floor surface first and set gypsum boards into wet sealant.

3. At other locations tool beads to ensure complete contact with joint surfaces and continuous coverage. Where exposed, form smooth concave surface suitable for finish painting.

4. Electrical Outlets: Seal smoke-tight to all four sides of drywall cutouts using acoustical sealant, with the back and outer sides tightly sealed by manually press-fitting and molding sheet seals to the exterior of the box in a manner that blocks the passage of sound.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 1

SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to this

section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide surface preparation and field painting of exposed surfaces, complete as indicated on

drawings, as specified, and as required for proper completion of the Work.

1. Surface preparation of surfaces to be painted.

2. Touching up of prime coats and other preparation necessary prior to finish

painting.

3. Painting, staining and otherwise finishing of new surfaces as indicated/scheduled

on the Drawings and specified in this and other Sections of this Project Manual.

B. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials including primers, emulsions,

enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime,

intermediate or finish coats.

C. Surfaces to be Painted: Except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as a

surface not to be painted, paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors or materials are

designated in "schedules". Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint

the same as similar adjacent materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated,

Architect will select these colors from standard colors or finishes available.

1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts

(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of

mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.

D. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,

and labels.

1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

a. Toilet partitions.

b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 2

c. Light fixtures.

d. Distribution cabinets.

2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible

spaces:

a. Furred areas.

b. Ceiling plenums.

c. Duct shafts.

3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:

a. Anodized aluminum.

b. Stainless steel.

c. Chromium plate.

d. Copper and copper alloys.

e. Bronze and brass.

4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:

a. Valve and damper operators.

b. Linkages.

c. Sensing devices.

d. Motor and fan shafts.

5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment

name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.


A. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”: Coordination of sealant and caulking installation with

application of paint.

B. Division 8 Sections "Metal Doors and Frames" and “Wood Doors"

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 3

C. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies”: Surface preparation and patching of

gypsum board systems.

D. Mechanical: Painting of mechanical equipment exposed to view and exposed to weather.

E. Electrical: Painting of electrical equipment exposed to view and exposed to the weather.


A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by

same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer,

and use only within recommended limits.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections of these specifications in which prime paints

are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings systems for various substrates.

Upon request from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of finish materials

provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used.

C. Acceptable Surfaces: The paint contractor and General Contractor shall be solely

responsible for determining that the wall is ready and suitable to be painted.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit color chips and manufacturer's product data to the Architect for color selection and

product review. Submittals shall include spread and coverage rate per coat.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products and materials in original unbroken containers with legible labels intact

bearing manufacturer's brand and name with application instructions printed thereon.

Paint shall arrive on the job ready mixed, except for tinting of undercoats and possible

thinning as recommended by manufacturer. 1.8 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Inspection of Surfaces: The painting contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the

work of others prior to the application of any paint or finishing material. If any surface to

be finished cannot be put in proper condition for finishing by customary cleaning, sanding,

and puttying operations, the painting contractor shall immediately notify the General

Contractor in writing or assume responsibility for and rectify any unsatisfactory finish

resulting.

B. Environmental Requirements: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to

environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied. Do

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 4

not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated.

C. Protection: All materials used on the job shall be stored in a single place designated by

the Contractor. Such storage place shall be kept neat and clean. All damage to the

storage area and its surroundings shall be repaired. Any soiled or used rags, waste and

trash must be removed from the building every night, and every precaution taken to avoid

the danger of fire.

D. Protect surfaces and objects inside and outside the building, as well as the grounds,

lawns, shrubbery, and adjacent properties against damage. The painting contractor shall

hold himself responsible for damage to adjacent furnishings.

E. Utilize barriers, wet paint signs and other means acceptable to Owner to prevent

pedestrian traffic in areas where painting is being performed

1.8 EXTRA STOCK

A. Extra Stock: Supply an extra 2% of total quantity of each paint used with a minimum of

two (2) gallons of each paint. Furnish in manufacturer's unopened, labeled containers for

Owner's use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Products of Farrell-Calhoun of Memphis, TN are specified to

establish quality and performance levels. Equivalent products of the following

manufacturers are also acceptable, subject to compliance with requirements:

1. PPG Industries, Inc./Pittsburgh Paint Division of Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.

2. Benjamin Moore & Company of Montvale, New Jersey.

3. Porter Paints, Porter International of Louisville, Kentucky.

4. Sherwin-Williams, Cleveland, Ohio.

B. Paint and primer applied in the field shall be the products of a single manufacturer.

C. Refer to Paint Schedule at the end of this section for listing of products.

D. Colors: Paint colors and sheens are listed in separate schedule. Where manufacturers

are named in this schedule, equivalent products of other manufacturers will be considered.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. This work shall be scheduled and coordinated with other trades and shall not proceed until

other work and job conditions are as required to achieve satisfactory results.

3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Before starting any work, examine surfaces to receive paint finishes carefully for defects

which cannot be corrected by the procedures specified for substrate preparation and

which might prevent satisfactory painting results. Do not proceed with painting until such

defects are corrected.

B. Secure approval of color samples before applying any paint or finish. All priming coats

and undercoats shall be tinted to the approximate shade of the final coat.

C. Start of painting shall be construed as acceptance of the surfaces to receive paint or other

finish.

D. Maintain temperature in area where painting is performed at a constant 65oF, or above,

and provide adequate ventilation for escape of moisture in order to prevent mildew;

damage to other work; improper drying of paint; wide variations in temperature which

might result in condensation on freshly painted surfaces.

E. Substrate Condition: Surfaces to receive work described in this section shall be smooth,

even, sound, thoroughly clean and dry and free of defects which would adversely affect

application of this work. Surfaces which do not meet the tolerances or quality

requirements imposed within the specifications governing substrate construction, shall be

repaired or replaced prior to initiating this work.

F. Mix, thin, modify, and apply materials only as stated in the manufacturer's written

instructions and recommendations.

G. Apply painting materials in a manner that is heavy enough to achieve uniform color and

lucid effect.

H. Allow each coats to dry thoroughly before applying succeeding coats.

I. Inspection of Coats: Notify the Architect for inspection between coats at least 24 hours in

advance. The number of coats specified are intended to provide full coverage.

Satisfactory coverage subject to the approval of the Architect. Additional coat or coats will

be required by the Architect if these coats do not give sufficient coverage. Final coat shall

match approved sample panel.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 6

3.3 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

A. General:

1. Surfaces: Surfaces shall be clean, dry, adequately protected from dampness,

smooth, even, true to plane and free of foreign materials, which will adversely

affect adhesion or appearance of applied coating. Comply with paint

manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for preparing substrates

indicated to receive paint finish.

2. Remove loose, spalling paint from previously painted surfaces utilizing wire

brushes, pressure washing or mechanical means, as required to provide a smooth

and sound substrate for the application of new paint.

3. Remove and neutralize mildew by scrubbing affected areas thoroughly with a

solution made by adding two ounces of Tri-Sodium Phosphate and eight ounces

of Sodium Hypochloride (Clorox) to one-gallon warm water. Use a scouring

powder if necessary to remove mildew spores. Rinse with clear water and allow

to dry before painting. Verify with substrate manufacturer that this cleaning

solution is acceptable for substrate. Where not acceptable, obtain substrate

manufacturer’s recommendation for mildew removal.

B. Gypsum Drywall:

1. Fill narrow, shallow cracks and small holes with spackling compound.

2. Rake deep, wide cracks and deep holes.

a. Dampen with clear water.

b. Fill with thin layers of drywall joint cement.

3. Allow to thoroughly dry.

4. Sand smooth. Do not raise nap of paper on drywall.

C. Wood for Paint Finish:

1. Clean soiled surfaces with alcohol wash.

2. Except where rough exterior surface is specified, sand to smooth and even

surface, then dust or vacuum.

3. Apply shellac to all knots, pitch and resinous sapwood before priming coat is

applied.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 7

4. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects with wood filler or lead putty

as required after priming coat has dried. Filler material must be compatible with

finish being applied. Color to match finish color.

D. Wood for Stain Finish:

1. Clean soiled surfaces with alcohol wash.

2. Except where rough exterior surface is specified, sand to smooth and even

surface, then dust or vacuum.

3. Apply shellac to all knots, pitch and resinous sapwood before priming coat is

applied.

4. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects with wood filler or lead putty

as required after priming coat has dried. Filler material must be compatible with

finish being applied. Color to match finish color.

E. Cementitious Surfaces (CMU): Prepare substrates in strict compliance with paint

manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not paint over chalking concrete.

G. Preparation of Ferrous Metal Surfaces:

1. Remove rust, mill scale and defective paint down to sound surface or bare metal,

using scraper, sandpaper, or wire brush as necessary. Grind if necessary to

remove shoulders at edge of sound paint to prevent flaws from photographing

through finish coats.

2. Remove dirt and grease with mineral spirits and wipe dry with clean cloths.

3. Touch-up all bare metal and damaged shop coats with specified rust-inhibitive

primer.

4. Necessary touching up of shop primer shall be done on ferrous metal surfaces of

all items installed adjacent to concrete prior to any openings between metal

surface and adjacent surfaces being filled in or caulked.

H. Preparation of Galvanized Metal Surfaces:

1. Remove dirt and grease with mineral spirits and wipe dry with clean cloths.

2. All galvanized steel surfaces shall be pre-treated with proprietary acid-bound

resinous or crystalline zinc phosphate preparations used according to the

manufacturer's directions prior to painting.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 8

I. Preparation of Aluminum Surfaces: Remove dirt and grease with mineral spirits, and wipe

dry with clean cloths.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. General:

1. Protection of Adjacent Surfaces and Mixed Items:

a. The Contractor not only shall protect his work at all times, but shall also

protect all adjacent work and materials by drop cloth, covering or other

methods during progress of his work.

b. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, device plates, lighting

fixtures, factory finished work, and similar items, or provide ample in-place

protection. Upon completion of each space, carefully replace all removed

items. This work shall be done only by skilled mechanics.

c. Remove electrical panel box covers and doors before painting walls.

Paint separately and reinstall after paint is dry.

2. The undercoats of paint and enamel shall be of approximate shade of the final

coat. All metal surfaces calling for enamel or varnished finish shall first have

priming coat well sanded, and shall be sanded between coats with fine sandpaper

or steel wool that will produce an even, smooth finish. Each coat shall be

perfectly dry before applying succeeding coats.

3. Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within limitations

recommended by paint manufacturer. Test with moisture meter. Exterior

surfaces shall not be painted in damp, frosty, or cold weather. Latex paints shall

not be applied when surface or air temperature is below 50oF.

4. Surfaces shall be finished the same as nearest or adjoining surfaces unless

otherwise shown.

5. Exposed access doors or panels, exposed electric panelboard covers, exposed

pipes, ducts and raceways shall be painted the same color as adjacent surfaces.

Paint piping exposed in finished areas as required for interior ferrous metal.

Where galvanized pipe occurs, prime galvanized surface as specified.

6. Hardware and accessories, fixtures and similar items placed prior to painting shall

be removed or protected during painting, replaced on completion of painting.

7. Remove silencers from metal door frames prior to painting. Afterwards, replace

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 9

silencers.

8. Paint the tops, bottoms and edges of doors to be painted to match the surface of

the doors after the hardware has been attached. Doors found unpainted upon the

completion of the painting work shall be taken down and painted.

9. Paint weather exposed HVAC and electrical equipment, unless otherwise directed

by Architect.

3.5 CLEANUP

A. During progress of the work, keep areas free form any unnecessary accumulation of tools,

equipment and surplus materials and debris.

B. At completion of work, remove surplus painting materials and debris from the site.

Remove spatters and leave this part of the work in a clean and properly finished condition.

3.6 PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Products of the Farrell-Calhoun are specified to establish quality standard. Equivalent

products of PPG Industries, Benjamin Moore and Sherwin-Williams are acceptable.

B. Dry Film Thickness: Accept where otherwise specified, each primer and coat shall be

applied in manufacturer’s recommended dry film thickness.

PAINTING SCHEDULE

Surface First Coat Second Coat Third Coat

Galvanized Metal FC 100% Acrylic

Bonding Primer 697

Omit first coat where

compatible factory

primer has been applied.

FC Tuff-Boy Alkyd

Industrial Gloss

Enamel 800 Line

FC Tuff-Boy Alkyd

Industrial Gloss Enamel

800 Line

Ferrous Metals – Semi-Gloss Enamel

FC Tuff-Boy Rust Stop

Primers White1022, Red

1024, Gray 1069

Omit first coat where

compatible factory

primer has been applied.

FC Tuff-Boy Alkyd

Industrial Gloss

Enamel 800 Line

FC Tuff-Boy Alkyd


800 Line

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 10

Dryfall Paint Exposed Overhead Structures

Open ceiling areas (Steel

deck, bar joist and steel

structures, conduit, cable

trays, HVAC ducts and

equipment; except items

that codes, laws and

regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction require

to remain unpainted.

Spray on primer

compatible with

manufacturers’

topcoat(s). Priming may

be omitted on factory-

primed, or previously

coated painted metals.

FC Tuff-Boy 8995

100% Acrylic

Waterborne Dryfall

Semi-Gloss - White

Dryfall coating may be

applied in one coat, if

applied coverage is

acceptable to Owner

and Architect. If one

coat does not provide

coverage acceptable to

Architect, apply a

second coat.

Gypsum Drywall - Semi-Gloss Finish

FC Perfik-Seal Interior

Latex Primer/Sealer 380

FC Semi-Gloss Latex

Enamel 680 Line

FC Semi-Gloss Latex

Enamel 680 Line

Gypsum Drywall – Eg-shel Finish

FC Perfik-Seal Interior

Latex Primer/Sealer 380

FC Interior Eggshell

Latex Enamel 370 Line

FC Interior Eggshell

Latex Enamel 370 Line

Wood Stained

Wood Kraft Penetrating

Wiping Stain 1110/1400

FC Wood Kraft

Polyurethane Varnish

Satin 1122 / Gloss

1120

FC Wood Kraft

Polyurethane Varnish

Satin 1122 / Gloss 1120

Wood Semi-Gloss Finish (Interior)

1 Coat

FC WB 100% Acrylic

Enamel Undercoater 699

FC Semi-Gloss Latex

Enamel 680 Line

FC Semi-Gloss Latex

Enamel 680 Line

Aluminum – Semi-Gloss Enamel

FC Tuff-Boy WB 100%

Acrylic DTM Wash

Primer 1016

1.3 mils, DFT: Omit first

coat where compatible

factory primer has been

applied.

FC Tuff-Boy Alkyd

Industrial Gloss

Enamel 800 Line

FC Tuff-Boy Alkyd


800 Line

Concrete Masonry Units (Interior)

FC Int/Ext Latex

Masonry Block Filler 470

FC Semi-Gloss Latex

Enamel 680 Line

FC Semi-Gloss Latex

Enamel 680 Line

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


Page 11

Accent Walls - Interior

(Approximately 20% of

wall surfaces)

As specified for

substrate and location in

"gray" tone where

necessary to ensure

density of accent color.

Finish coat as

specified for substrate

and location, applied

to manufacturer's

recommend dry film

thickness.

Finish coat as specified

for substrate and

location, applied to

manufacturer's

recommend dry film

thickness.

Walls indicated to Receive Epoxy Paint

Primer compatible with

substrates and

manufacturers’

topcoat(s).

1270 Tuff Boy Line

Waterborne PreCat

Acrylic Epoxy

1270 Tuff Boy Line

Waterborne PreCat

Acrylic Epoxy

SAFETY PAINT/COLORS

Red Farrell-Calhoun Premium

Alkyd Industrial Gloss

Enamel 800

International Red

Orange Farrell-Calhoun Premium


Enamel 800

International Orange

Yellow Farrell-Calhoun Premium


Enamel 800

Safety Zone Yellow


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide visual display boards as specified, as indicated on Drawings and as required for proper completion of the Work.

1. Markerboards.

2. Tackboards

3. Support systems for visual display boards, including edge trim and marker trays.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show location of panel joints. Include sections of typical trim members.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display surface indicated (manufacturer’s color charts showing the full range of colors and textures available) and as follows:

1. Panel face sheets.

2. Samples of accessories involving color selection.

D. Maintenance Data: Provide maintenance data for visual display boards for inclusion in maintenance manuals.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of marker boards through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of visual display surfaces.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fabrics with the surface-burning characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.


A. Deliver factory-built visual display boards, including factory-applied trim where indicated, completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site.

B. Store visual display units vertically with packing materials between each unit.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating visual display surfaces without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

2. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the Work.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities.

b. Surfaces become slick or shiny.

c. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.

2. Warranty Period: Life of the building, or as long as they are installed and used.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS – GENERAL

A. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, tempered.

B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-1, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

C. Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.

2.2 MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Porcelain-Enamel Marker Board/Cork Bulletin Board Combination: Claridge Series 4 combination markerboard and bulletin board is specified. Provide in size indicated on Drawings.

B. Marker Board: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated marker board assembly of 3-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and .024 inch (.61 mm), porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements equivalent products manufactured by:

a. Best-Rite Manufacturing.

b. Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc.

c. Egan Visual Inc.

d. Ghent Manufacturing Inc.

e. Marsh Industries, Inc.

f. PolyVision Corporation.

2. Face Sheet: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) enameling grade steel especially processed for temperatures used in coating porcelain on steel. Coat exposed face and edges with a 3-coat process consisting of primer, ground coat, and color cover coat. Coat concealed face with a 2-coat process consisting of primer and ground coat. Fuse cover and ground coats to steel at manufacturer’s standard firing temperatures, but not less than 1200 deg F (649 deg C).

3. Core: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick, particleboard core material complying with requirements of ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-1.

4. Backing Sheet: 0.005 inch (0.127 mm) thick, aluminum-foil sheet backing.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


5. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer’s standard, moisture-resistant, thermoplastic-type adhesive.

C. Tackboard Materials: Claridge flame-retardant “Fabricork”, or equal mounted on Durocore.

1. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

2. Select from manufacturers’ standard colors.

3. Thickness: Total laminated thickness of core and covering is ½”.

2.3 RAIL SUPPORT SYSTEM FOR MARKER BOARDS – REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Best-Rite Manufacturing.

2. Egan Visual Inc.

3. K.O.H. Design, Inc.

4. Peter Pepper Products, Inc.

5. PolyVision Corporation.

6. Newline Products, Ltd.

B. Support Rails: Horizontal, wall-mounted, extruded-aluminum rails designed to receive hanger clip and to support marker boards.

1. Finish: Clear anodic.

C. Hanger Clips: Extruded aluminum with finish to match rails; designed to support independent visual display boards by engaging support rail and top trim of board.

D. Panel Clips: Extruded aluminum.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-) thick, extruded aluminum; of size and shape indicated.

1. Factory-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard.

B. Marker Tray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous tray

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end closures.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, waterproof adhesive.

B. Factory-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate factory-assembled units with trim and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.

1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect, as indicated on approved Shop Drawings.

2. Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-joint spline system between abutting sections of chalkboards, marker boards.

3. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions indicated.

C. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to a minimum. Miter corners to neat, hairline closure.

1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual display units at manufacturer's factory before shipment.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

D. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: non-specular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

B. Examine walls and partitions for proper backing for visual display surfaces.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove dirt, scaling paint, projections, and depressions that will affect smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.

B. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, and substances that will impair bond between visual display boards and substrates to which they are attached.


A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. See plans (elevations).

B. Deliver factory-built visual display boards completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimension exceeds panel size, provide 2 or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site. Use splines at joints to maintain surface alignment.

C. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, wood blocking, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

D. Coordinate project-site-assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.

E. Display Rails: Install rails in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings.


A. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one cleaning label to visual display surface in each room.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

C. Cover and protect marker board surfaces after installation and cleaning.

3.5 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Instruct Owner's personnel on maintenance and cleaning of marker boards.

B. Advise Owner, in writing, to avoid the use of "No Odor" and "Odorless" markers. These products may make erasing and cleaning boards more difficult.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements apply to work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide solid polyethylene toilet partitions, and urinal screens.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Overhead structural steel supports for ceiling hung pilasters: Section 05 51 00, Metal Fabrications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Specified items indicating all hardware and fittings, material, finish, and latching.

B. Shop Drawings: Construction details at 1/2 scale, showing installation details, anchoring and leveling devices.

1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TOILET PARTITIONS

A. Solid polyethylene: water resistant; graffiti resistant; non-absorbent; contain a minimum 30 percent post-consumer recycled plastic; Class C flame spread rating.

B. Fabricate to dimensions shown or specified.

C. Toilet Enclosures:

1. Type: Ceiling hung

2. Reinforce panels shown to receive toilet tissue holders or grab bars.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


D. Hardware Set – Stainless Steel:

1. Brackets: Continuous stamped stainless steel 54-1/2 inches length (1384 mm) number 4 satin finish.

2. Hinges: Cast Type 304 stainless steel with number 4 finish with gravity acting cam allowing doors to be set at various positions.

3. Hinges: Continuous stainless steel cam 1/4 inch (6 mm) pin- 54-1/2 inches length (1384 mm). Allows doors to fully close for any outswing or handicapped accessible compartments. Inswing doors shall remain open at 20 degrees in rest position.

4. Latch and Keeper: Type 304 cast stainless steel with Number 4 finish; slide latch with combination stop and emergency release feature.

5. Coat Hook: Type 304 cast stainless steel with Number 4 finish; combination hook and bumper on inswinging doors.

6. Door Pull: Type 304 cast stainless steel with Number 4 finish.

7. Upper pivots and lower hinges adjustable to hold doors open 30 degrees.

8. Latching devices and hinges for handicap compartments shall comply with ADA requirements.

9. Keeper:

a. U-slot to engage bar of throw latch.

b. Combined with rubber bumper stop.

10. Handicapped Toilets:

a. Upper pivots and lower hinges to hold out swinging doors in closed position.

b. Provide U-type doors pulls, approximately 100 mm (four inches) long on pull side.

E. Urinal Screens:

1. Type III, Style E (wall hung), with integral flanges and continuous, full height wall anchor plate.

2. Screen 600 mm (24 inches) wide and 1060 mm (42 inches high), unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Products of the following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Bradley

2. Scranton Products

3. ASI

4. Ampco

B. Equivalent products of other manufacturer’s complying with specified requirements will be considered. Submit substitution requests in accordance with Division 1 Section – Product Substitutions.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. Partition Fasteners: CID A-A-60003.

B. Use expansion bolts, CID A-A-60003, for anchoring to solid masonry or concrete.

C. Use toggle bolts, CID A-A-60003, for anchoring to hollow masonry or stud framed walls.

D. Use steel bolts FS-B-575, for anchoring pilasters to overhead steel supports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install in rigid manner, straight, plumb and with all horizontal lines level.

2. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting and fitting in finish work.

3. Use hex-bolts for through-bolting.

4. Adjust hardware and leave in freely working order.

5. Clean finished surfaces and leave free of imperfections.

B. Panels and Pilasters:

1. Support panels, except urinal screens, and pilaster abutting building walls near top and bottom by stirrup supports secured to partitions with through-bolts.

2. Secure stirrups to walls with two suitable anchoring devices for each stirrup.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3. Secure panels to faces of pilaster near top and bottom with stirrup supports, through-bolted to panels and machine screwed to each pilaster.

4. Secure edges of panels to edges of pilasters near top and bottom with "U" shaped brackets.

C. Urinal Screens:

1. Anchor urinal screen flange to walls with minimum of four bolts both side of panel.

2. Space anchors at top and bottom and equally in between.


A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swing doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swing doors (and entrance swing doors) to return to fully closed position.

B. Clean and Protect: Clean exposed surfaces of compartment systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 10 22 25 RETRACTABLE WALL

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 – General Requirements apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide automatic vertically retractable acoustical wall as shown on as specified and as indicated on Drawings. Provide hardware, seals, lifting machinery, electrical controls are required for complete installation and proper operation.


A. Refer to Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications” for the main support steel beam for the wall, as well as the miscellaneous support steel for the lifting machinery for the automatic vertically retractable acoustical wall.

B. Refer to Division 9 Section “Acoustical Ceiling” for ceiling storage pockets along

axis of automatic vertically retractable acoustical wall. C. Refer to Division 9 Section “Acoustical Insulation and Sealants” Provide acoustical

insulation in the fixed walls at both ends of the automatic and vertically retractable acoustical wall, and above the ceiling.

D. Refer to Division 26 – Electrical for site wiring and connections for main power,

including disconnect switches at each motor location, and connections for control, including installation of key switches.

1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: The operable wall shall be installed by qualified

representatives and/or installers and/or distributors of the manufacturer, according to the manufacturers written instructions and recommendations. Installer shall also provide proof of having installed similar products within the last five years.

A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: The operable wall must be manufactured by a

certified ISO-9001-2008 company or an equivalent quality control system. 1.5 REFERENCES

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


A. ASTM E90, Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission

Loss of Building Partitions. Annex A1.15 Operable (Folding or Sliding Walls) Annex A1.15.3 Operation – “The specimen shall not be designated an operable wall unless it opens and closes in a normal manner. It shall be fully opened and closed at least five times after installation is completed and tested without further adjustments.”

B. ASTM E413, Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. C. ASTM E557, Standard Practice for Architectural Application and Insulation of

Operable Partitions. D. ISO 354, Measurement of Sound Absorption E. ISO 140-3, Measurement of Airborne Sound Insulation F. ASTM C423, Measurement of Sound Absorption

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturers’ technical data and installation instructions for operable wall.

B. Submit shop drawings showing complete layout of operable wall system based on

field verified dimensions. The drawings shall include dimensional relationship to adjoining work. Include details indicating materials, finishes, tolerances, and methods of attachment to building steel and electrical requirements.

C Submit certified test reports, based on testing listing in the above article,

evidencing compliance to acoustical STC (Rw). D. Submit operating and maintenance manual. E. Submit manufacturer’s written warranty.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1.7 TOLERANCES

A. Floor Flatness: The floor underneath the operable wall along its axis, shall be flat to within +/- ¼” (6 mm) over the entire length of an operable wall. The peak to valley undulation of +/- ¼” (6 mm) shall not be closer together than 24” (610 mm) and a peak to valley undulation of +/- 1/8” (3 mm) shall not be closer than 12” (305 mm).

B. Overhead Support: Support steel above the operable wall along its axis shall be

parallel to the floor within +/-½” (12.7 mm) for the entire length of the operable wall. This includes loaded deflection. The beam must also be parallel to the centre line of the wall within + 1/8” (3 mm), left to right.

B. Vertical Tolerance: The fixed walls at either end of the operable wall shall be

within +1/4” (6 mm)-0”, from plumb vertical. C. The fixed walls at either end of the operable wall shall be flat to within +0”, -1/4” (6

mm). 1.8 WARRANTY

A. Basic Warranty: The operable wall shall be warranted free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years or five thousand (5,000) cycles, whichever occurs first, from the date of shipment.

B. Extended Parts Warranty: An extended warranty on parts (excluding touch screen operator stations) is available in addition to the basic warranty. It includes coverage on all parts for a period of ten (10) years or five thousand (5,000) cycles, whichever occurs first from date of shipment. Refer to Owner’s manual for full warranty details.

C. Parts and labor required to maintain the operable wall and parts subject to normal

wear and tear are not covered under the warranty and are the owner’s responsibility.

D. Acoustical Performance: The operable wall shall retain its acoustical properties for

10 years from the date of shipment providing proper maintenance has been performed on the partition.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERABLE WALL

A. Basis-of Design Manufacturer: Skyfold Zenith® Automatic Vertically Retractable Acoustic Walls as manufactured by Skyfold Inc. of Baie d’Urfe (Montréal), Québec, Canada (514) 457-4767. E-mail: [email protected]

B. Model: Zenith® 55, System STC 55 (Rw 54), Panel Construction STC 61 (Rw 60). The operable wall shall be designed to have a design life of at least 10,000 complete closed to opened to closed cycles.

C. Provide a completely functioning operable wall, tested in full accordance and compliance with ASTM E90 (ISO 140-3), shall achieve, from an independent laboratory, a Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating (Rw value) of not less than 55.

D. Systems of other manufacturer’s will be considered, meeting or exceeding the

specified requirements and performance criteria. Submit requests for substitutions in accordance with Division 1 Section – Product Substitutions.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Acoustical Panels: Acoustical panels shall be faced with steel that is compatible with the specified panel finish material.

B. Finish: 1/32” Plastic laminate in color selected by Architect. Panels. The following

criteria must be met:

1. Maximum weight of material: 0.111 lbs/ft² (0.542 kg/m²) 2. Maximum thickness of material: 1/8” (3mm)

C. Fire-Treatment: To the maximum extent possible, acoustical panels, together with the sound insulation, shall be made of non-combustible or fire-treated materials.

D. Acoustical panels shall be fabricated to be as stiff as possible in order to satisfy the rigid criteria when the operable wall is down (closed) and to ensure that there is no interference between panels when the wall is in motion.

E. Acoustical panels shall be architecturally flat with no bowing, oil canning, warping,

waviness or any other surface deformation and discontinuity. F. The operable wall shall be visibly flat and rigid in the down (closed) position.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


F. There shall be no exposed hinges, brackets, screws, and no part of the mechanical system shall be visible when the operable wall is in the down (closed) position.

G. Acoustical panels shall meet the following STC ratings in accordance with ASTM E90 (ISO 140-3) specification as reported by an independent laboratory.

H. Panel Edges: Panel edges shall be right angled, with a minimum radius not more

than 1/16” (1.6 mm). I. Panel Shape/Size: Rectangular, nominally of the same size, unless requested

otherwise by the architect. J. Panel Joints: Joints between panel, vertical and horizontal, shall be no more than

approximately ½” (12.7 mm) wide. H. Stacking: The operable wall shall stack in the up (open) position into a space no

greater than 65” (1650mm) wide. The operable wall shall have a stacking height ratio in the range of 1:5 to 1:10, depending on the height of the wall.

I. Panel Removal: Each acoustical panel shall be individually removable using only

a screw driver. No special tools or equipment shall be required. The removal of a single acoustical panel shall not affect, dislocate or cause the removal of any adjacent panels or other acoustical panels.

J. Panel Weight: The operable wall shall not weigh more than~6.8 lbs per ft² (33.3

kg per m²). This preceding weights do not include the motor drive or the architectural finish on the acoustical panels and are based on 24’-0” long x 12’-0” high (7315mm x 3660mm) operable wall.

2.3 FOLDING MECHANISM

A. Folding Extension Mechanism: To the greatest extent possible, the hanging,

folding and extension mechanism shall be made from structural grade aluminum extrusions and structural shapes, to minimize the weight of the system.

B. Component Wear Surfaces: Wear surfaces of all wear components, such as

bushings, spacers, pins, discs, bearings, and sleeves shall be designed to function quietly and with minimum wear, over the 10,000 cycle design life of the operable wall.

C. Hangers: Hangers, which fasten the lifting mechanism to the support steel, shall

be fabricated from steel and welded or bolted to the support steel supplied by others.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2.4 MOTOR DRIVE

A. The motor drive shall be sized properly so that it can open and close the operable wall effectively over the 10,000 cycle design life of the wall, at the minimum design speed specified under “System Operation”.

B. The folding mechanism shall be designed to function as smoothly, quietly and

safely as possible. Wherever possible, ball bearings shall be used instead of bushings and wear surfaces. In no circumstance shall chain or belt drive systems be acceptable.

C. Cables: There shall be a wire rope cable for every set of folding mechanism. This

cable shall be of 6 x 31 construction aircraft cable and shall be made of galvanized steel. The diameter of the cables shall be sized so that they shall be able to hold the entire weight of the operable wall, with the appropriate safety factor. 1. The cable wraps on yoyo drums with 2 safety wraps and multiple layers of

cable. 2. The line shaft, sized to deliver the required torque with minimum

deflection, shall support and rotate the cable drums. 3. Flange bearings shall be used for the drive system, located immediately

on both sides of the drum assembly.

D. Size: The motor drive shall be sized to deliver sufficient amount of torque to safely and effectively raise and lower the operable wall over its design life.

E. Drive Standards: The motor drive shall meet the latest in industry standards in thermal protection, overload protection, quick acting fuses, etc., in order to ensure the safety and reliability of the system.

2.5 SAFETY EQUIPMENT

A. Electromagnetic Brake: The operable wall shall employ an electromagnetic type of brake which shall activate firmly, without hesitation, when power is lost to the system. This brake shall have a minimum retarding torque rating equal to 200% of the motor drive’s full load torque. The drive system shall be equipped with a manual override and a brake release lever.

B. Dynamic Brake.The operable wall shall employ a dynamic brake, distinct and

separate from the electromagnetic brake in order to lower the operable wall at a controlled speed of no more than approximately 150% of the normal down speed, in the case of a catastrophic failure in the motor drive’s power train. Alternately, the operable wall shall employ a brake, distinct and separate from the

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


electromagnetic brake in order to completely halt the downward motion of the wall in the case of a catastrophic failure in the power train.

C. Limit Switches: The operable wall shall employ electrical or other limit switches in

order to stop the wall at its up and down travel limits. D. Over Torque Detectors: The operable wall shall employ an over torque detector in

order to sense a jam in the system and to act as an over travel limit in the up direction should the primary limit switch fail to act. This over torque sensor shall be mechanical, using the motor’s torque arm in its over torque detection.

E. Sensing Strip: The entire length of the bottom edge of the operable wall shall be

equipped with a continuous pressure sensing strip which shall cut power to the motor drive and shall activate the electromagnetic brake, if the sensing edge comes in firm contact with an object, before the operable wall is in the full down (closed) position. The operable wall will automatically reverse direction and ascend for approximately 3 seconds to clear the obstruction. The power shall remain cut to the motor drive until the switches have been released. The operation of the operable wall can resume once the obstruction is removed.

2.6 ELECTRICAL

A. The operable wall shall be equipped for a three phase power supply to the electrical control box.

B. Standard electrical control box will be NEMA 1. NEMA 4 is also available upon

request. C. Low voltage wiring (by others). 18 gauge wiring from the switches to the control

box. D. Switches (standard): Two (2) push button switches wired in series with power

controlled by a single, three position key switch. One push button switch will be equipped with an LED that flashes fault codes in case of an electrical system failure. (Installation and wiring by others).

2.7. FACTORY FABRICATION

A. Factory assemble components, assemblies and systems into the largest possible assemblies in order to minimize the amount of on-site assembly.

2.8 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. In standard push button operation, using two push button switches wired in series with power controlled by a single, three position key switch. In the standard, push button scenario, turning the key from the “off” position shall cause the wall to move

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


in the designated direction “up” or “down” once both push buttons are depressed. When hand pressure is removed, the wall shall immediately stop. The operable wall shall stop in a quick and positive fashion without coasting. As a normal part of the operation, it shall be possible to partially open (or close) the wall, stop it and then reverse the operation.

B. From a fully open position, the operable wall shall be able to go through its entire

cycle of closing and/or opening without any manual intervention. C. When the operable wall is being lowered (closed) it shall come automatically to

rest once it has reached the fully down (closed) position. D. When the operable wall is being lifted (opened) it shall come automatically to rest

once it has reached the fully up (open) position. E. The operable wall shall automatically and acoustically seal against the floor

without the need for any manual intervention. The floor seals shall leave a joint between the floor and the bottom acoustical panels of not more than approximately 2” (51 mm).

F. The operable wall shall automatically and acoustically seal against the two end

walls without the need for any manual intervention. The end seals shall act in such a way as not to come into contact with the end walls while the operable wall is in motion. The end seals shall leave a joint between the acoustical panels and the end walls of no more than approximately 1” (25 mm). Seals that rub or brush against the end walls are not acceptable. Once the operable wall reaches the full down position, the end seals shall activate automatically. The key switch does not need to be held during the deployment of the end seals.

G. The operable wall shall automatically and acoustically seal against the ceiling

without any manual intervention. The top seals shall leave a joint between the top acoustical panels and the ceiling of the pocket of not more than approximately 2” (51 mm).

H. When the operable wall is being lowered (closed), it shall stop if the leading

(bottom) edge comes into firm contact with any object between it and the floor. The operable wall will then automatically reverse its direction and ascend for approximately 3 seconds to clear the object. The regular operation of the operable wall can resume once the obstruction has been removed.

J. The operable wall shall open and close at an average speed of approximately 5 to

10 vertical feet per minute (1.5 to 3 meters per minute). PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


A. Inspect the relevant aspects of the site such as the evenness of the floor, walls,

structural steel, etc., and ensure that these are within the tolerances stated in Part – 1 of this specification.

B. Confirm in writing to the General Contractor or contract manager any deviations

from these tolerances. Do not proceed until these conditions are made good.

3.2 MEASUREMENT

A. Perform precise field measurements before manufacturing components or assemblies.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install operable walls in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations.

B. The operable wall supplier shall not deliver or install this product until the General

Contractor can ensure in writing safe storage and protection for the operable wall for the duration of the project.


A. Adjust and fine-tune the operable walls to ensure that all seals are operating and sealing properly and that the operable walls are in correct and smooth operation.

B. Clean operable after installation. Remove dirt, oil, grime, and other deleterious

materials. Leave the operable wall in a state of cleanliness satisfactory to the Architect and the Owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 10 22 26 ACCORDION FOLDING PARTITION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Furnish and install accordion folding partitions as indicated in drawings.


1. Division 03 Sections for concrete tolerances required.

2. Division 05 Sections for primary structural support, including pre-punching of support members by structural steel supplier per partition supplier’s template.

3. Division 06 Sections for wood framing and supports, and blocking at head and jambs as required.

4. Division 09 Sections for wall and ceiling framing at head and jambs.

5. Refer to Division 26, if folding partition requires electrical operation


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified in writing by the partition manufacturer, as qualified to install the manufacturer’s partition systems for work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

B. Preparation of the opening shall conform to the dimensions specified, plumb, level, and in accordance to building practices.

C. Acoustical Performance: Test partitions in an independent acoustical laboratory in accordance with ASTM E90 to attain no less than the STC rating specified. Provide a complete and unedited written test report by the testing laboratory upon request.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Material descriptions, construction details, finishes, installation details, and operating instructions for each type of partition, component, and accessory specified.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of partitions. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other construction, and accessories. Indicate dimensions, weights, conditions at openings, and at storage areas, and required installation, storage, and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, including floor tolerances required and direction of travel. Indicate blocking to be provided by others.

C. Setting Drawings: Show imbedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support beam punching template.

D. Samples: Color samples demonstrating full range of finishes available by architect. Verification samples will be available in same thickness and material indicated for the work.


A. Clearly mark packages and partitions with numbering systems used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on partitions.

B. Protect partitions during delivery, storage, and handling to comply with manufacturer’s direction and as required to prevent damage.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide written warranty by manufacturer of partitions agreeing to repair or replace any components with manufacturing defects.

B. Warranty period: Two (2) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Basis-of-Design is product of Modernfold, Inc.; 215 West New Road Greenfield, IN 46140/Toll Free: 800.869.9685. email: [email protected] www.modernfold.com.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide the following product: Soundmaster #12: Manually operated, top supported, accordion folding.

2. Sound Rating: STC 40

B. Equivalent products of Panelfold are acceptable. Products of other manufacturers will be considered.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION

A. Partition shall consist of steel hinge plates welded to 3/16-inch (5mm) diameter vertical steel rods, with a single row of plates at the bottom and top with intermediate rows at approximately 42-inch (1067mm) on center. Partitions 10'-0" (3048mm) high or over shall have a double row of


http://www.modernfold.com/

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


hinge plates at the top. A high tensile alloy steel trolley yoke, functioning as a hinge pin at required intervals, supports the frame assembly.

2.3 PARTITION FINISHES

A. Face finish shall be (select as required): Reinforced heavy duty vinyl with woven backing weighing not less than 27 ounces per lineal yard.

B. Partition Trim: Exposed sweep strips of one consistent color, as selected by Architect.

2.4 SOUND SEALS

A. Sweep Strips/Sound Channel: Pairs of three-layer flexible sweep strips at top and bottom. Vertical female sound channel shall be polyurethane foam lined.

B. Sound Insulation: 24-gage, V-grooved steel panels and heavy duty flame resistant acoustical membrane. Each panel attaches to the frame with steel leaf fasteners.

C. Pairs of Flexible Sweep Strips: Shall be provided at top and bottom of the partition. Air release for air trapped within the folding partition shall be accomplished during operation by a series of 3/8-inch (9.5mm) diameter holes through the lead post molding.

2.5 HARDWARE

A. Grip type hand pulls shall be die cast zinc, satin chrome finish. Extruded aluminum or plastic hand pulls will not be accepted.

2.6 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Provide #6, or #7 Suspension System, track and trolley sizes matched to the size of the partition.

1. Suspension Tracks: Continuous “C” channel shaped track, connected to the structural support.

2. Carriers: The accordion folding partition shall be suspended from the track by two-wheel intermediate and four-wheel lead trolley assemblies.

2.7 ELECTRICAL OPERATION

A. Electrical Operation: Electrically operated Soundmaster 12 shall be operated in 11-gage steel track with flanged steel ball bearing trolleys. Drive mechanism shall be roller chain type. All auxillary equipment for electrical operation including track with integral chain guides, roller chain, drive unit and motor key operated control, overload safety device, and drive sprocket assemblies shall be supplied by partition manufacturer. Power supply circuits, wiring, and electrical connection shall be work by the electrical contractor.

B. Jamb-Lock: Back post to be secured to the wall by the “Jamb-Lock” mechanism concealed within the back post to provide a quick means of releasing and reattaching the partition for cleaning and decorative purposes.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Locks: Satin chrome hand pulls with (select) manufacturer’s standard with master-keyed locks. Master-keyed cylinders furnished by others. Locks shall be an integral part of the pull; Manually Operated Partitions Only.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with partition manufacturer’s written installation instructions, Drawings, and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Install partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting have been completed.

C. Defective partitions are not acceptable.


A. Clean partition surfaces upon completing installation of partitions to remove dust, dirt, adhesives, and other foreign materials according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the manufacturer and installer that insure operable partitions are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust partitions to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly throughout entire operational range. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

3.4 EXAMINATION

A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of partitions. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to Owner’s representative.

B. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manual to Owner’s representative.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 10 50 10 STANDARD STEEL LOCKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide all welded steel lockers, as indicated on drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the work.


A. Division 3 concrete bases. B. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for wood ground and furring for anchoring lockers.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. ASTM A 1008 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-

Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, indicating construction, materials,

dimensions, door frames, doors, handles, locks, ventilation, options, accessories, locker benches, finish, locker layout, anchoring, and installation details.

C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard color samples. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty.


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. C. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design: Lyon Workspace Products, PO Box 671, Aurora, Illinois 60507. Toll Free (800) 323-0082. Phone (630) 892-8941. Fax (800) 367-6681. Web Site www.lyonworkspace.com. E-Mail [email protected]. Equivalent products of the following manufacturers are acceptable. 1. Penco Products 2. Republic Storage Products, LLC 3. Global Industries

2.2 STEEL LOCKERS

A. Model: Standard Quiet Lockers. B. Style: Single tier, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings]. C. Locker Size: 12 inches wide by 18 inches deep by 60 inches high D. Locker Configuration: [Single row] [Double row] [As indicated on the Drawings]. E. Construction: Fully assembled. F. Material:

1. Steel: ASTM A 1008, Class I, mild-annealed, cold-rolled steel, free from surface imperfections, ASTM A 653, galvannealed steel.

2. Bolts: Zinc plated or other comparable rust-retardant treatment.

G. Body:

1. 24-gauge steel. 2. Flanged to give double thickness of metal at back vertical corners.

H. Door Frame:

1. 16-gauge formed-steel channels.

2. Vertical Members: Additional flange to form continuous door strike.

3. Corners: Lapped and welded into rigid assembly.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


4. Bottom Cross Members: Tang at each end that fits through slot in rear flange of upright frame member to prevent twisting out of alignment.

5. Top and Bottom Cross Members: Provide support for front edge of locker top and bottom.

I. Doors:

1. 1-piece,14-gauge steel.

2. Single, Double, and Triple-Tier Locker Doors: Both vertical edges formed into channel-shaped formation. Top and bottom flanged at 90-degree angle.

J. Ventilation: Single-Tier Lockers: Six 3-1/2-inch louvers top and bottom. K. Hinges:

1. Height: Minimum of 2 inches.

2. Type: 0.050-inch thick steel, 5-knuckle, full-loop hinge forming double thickness on each leaf.

3. Attachment: Set hinges in slot in door and frame and projection welded to frame and securely attached to door.

4. Hinge Pin: Spun over at ends to resist removal.

5. Single-Tier Lockers, 48 Inches and Higher: 3 hinges.

6. All Other Tiers: 2 hinges.

7. Mounting: Right-hand side of door.

L. Multi-Point Locking Device:

1. Single-Tier Lockers, 48 Inches and Higher, Locking Device: Engage frame at 3 points.

2. Double and Triple-Tier Locking Device: Engage frame at 2 points.

3. Channel-Shaped Locking Device:

a. Full-length reinforcing ribs.

b. Quiet design using nylon-guide inserts to reduce metal-to-metal contact.

4. Lock Bar: Enclosed on 3 sides and operate within channel formation of door.

5. Locking Device: Prelocking so mechanism can be locked in open position. Door locking automatically when closed.

6. Door Jambs: Single-Tier Lockers, 48 Inches and Higher: 3 door jambs.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


a. Safety Reverse Nose for Each Jamb: Eliminate hazard of sharp-pointed edges protruding into locker.

b. Easily replaceable soft rubber bumper for each jamb.

7. Single-point latch.

8. Doors: Provided with lock hole filler to permit use of built-in key or combination lock.

M. Handles:

1. Tamper-Guard Handles:

a. Single, double, and triple-tier lockers.

b. Chrome-plated, die-cast zinc alloy, with minimum tensile strength of 40,000 psi.

c. No moving parts shall operate against outside surface of locker.

d. Padlock Attachment: Integral part of lift, attached directly to locking bar and protected by fixed-handle housing.

e. Built-in padlock strike.

2. Single-Point Latching System:

a. Single

b. 4-1/8 inches wide by 6-1/16 inches high by 1-1/4 inches deep.

c. Flush-front appearance.

d. Operates with no moving parts.

e. Pan reinforcements, 18 gauge.

N. Shelves:

1. Single-tier lockers.

2. 1 shelf, approximately 9 inches below top.

3. Single sheet, 24-gauge steel.

4. Flanged on 4 sides.

5. Safety Front Flange: Double flanged with second bend turned 45 degrees.

6. Attachment: Minimum of 2 points through each side flange.

O. Coat Hooks:

1. Single lockers.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2. 1 double-prong ceiling hook and 3 single-prong wall hooks.

3. Steel rod stock with ball points for snag-free use.

4. Attachment: Minimum 2 bolts.

5. Finish: Zinc-plated or comparable rust-retardant treatment.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Extra Shelves:

1. Single sheet, 24-gauge steel.

2. Flanged on 4 sides.

3. Safety Front Flange: Double flanged with second bend turned 45 degrees.

4. Attachment: Minimum of 2 points through each side flange.

B. Number Plates:

1. Aluminum.

2. Size: 2-3/4 inches wide by 1 inch high.

3. Numbers: Clearly etched numbers a minimum of 3/8 inch high.

4. Attachment: Attach in prepunched holes near top of doors.

C. Locks: Combination padlock.

D. Tops: Individual-sloping tops.

E. Bottoms: Painted steel. Same color as interior walls.

F. Closures and Fillers:

1. Top closures, closure strips, front expansion fillers, and corner fillers.

2. Fill spaces between 2 lockers or between lockers and walls as required for proper fit.

G. End Panels:

1. End Cover Panels: 14-gauge steel, construction bolt heads exposed at perimeter.

2. End Finishing Panels: 16-gauge steel, no bolt heads exposed.

2.4 LOCKER BENCHES

A. Laminated Hardwood Benches: Laminated hardwood with clear coat finish.

1. Size: 24” D x 48”W x 1-1/4 inches thick by _______ feet long.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2. Finish: Acrylic, 2 coats.

3. Support Angles: Black steel brackets of size required to securely support locker bench.

2.5 FINISH

A. General: Factory apply finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Standard Finish: Exposed steel parts shall be thoroughly cleaned, given bonding and rust-inhibitive phosphate treatment, and electrostatically sprayed with powder coat. Baked-on finish.

C. Antimicrobial Finish: Apply antimicrobial finish.

D. Color:

1. Exterior Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

2. Interior Color: Dove Gray.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive lockers. Notify Architect if areas are not acceptable. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lockers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Install lockers plumb, level, square, rigid, with flush installation.

C. Use manufacturer's supplied hardware.

D. Anchoring: Securely Anchor lockers to base and walls as indicated on the Drawings.

E. Sloping Hoods and Metal Fillers: Install sloping hoods and metal fillers using concealed fasteners.

F. Joints: Provide flush hairline joints against adjacent surfaces.

G. Number Plates: Attach number plates to face of doors level with 2 aluminum rivets. Attach in sequence as indicated on the Drawings.

H. Locker Benches: Install locker benches securely anchored to base on which lockers are mounted.

I. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by Architect.

J. Remove and replace defective or damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors, locks, and operating hardware to function properly and for smooth operation without binding.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed lockers from damage during construction.

END OF SECTION

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 10 90 00 FIXED LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Provide extruded-aluminum louvers and blank-off panels as indicated on Drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of the Work.

1. Type: Fixed.

2. Blank-off panels for louvers.


A. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in perimeter joints between louver frames and adjoining construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.


A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act on vertical projection of louvers.

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1436 Pa), acting inward or outward, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


C. Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, Air-Leakage, and Wind-Driven Rain Ratings: Provide louvers complying with performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. Show blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

1. For installed louvers indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

B. Samples: Provide verification samples of each type of metal finish specified. If finish is not specified, provide samples of manufacturer’s standard finishes for Architect’s selection.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver.

D. Product Certificates: Certificates signed by louver manufacturer certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements and are licensed to bear the AMCA sealed based on tests made according to AMCA 500 and complying with AMCA's Certified Ratings Program.

E. Qualifications Data: To demonstrate capabilities provide lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Contracting Officers, or Owner's Representative.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers through one source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be alike in one or more respects regarding type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."

C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.


A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

B. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Airolite Company (The).

2. Airline Products Co.

3. C/S Group, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.

B. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.

1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

2. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size and material required for loading and installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as needed for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with SSPC Paint 12, but containing no asbestos, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.

1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing pattern unless horizontal mullions are indicated.

2. Free Area: Louver design shall allow for a minimum 50% free area.

C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.

D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

1. Frame Type: Channel type, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

F. Where indicated, provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers.

G. Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers where indicated, or required for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to building interior.

H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.

2.4 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Louver Construction: Provide fixed-blade louvers with extruded aluminum frames and blades.

1. Performance Requirements: Maximum standard airflow not less than 8500 cfm (4010 L/s) with not more than 0.20 wg (50-Pa) static pressure loss.

2. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Horizontal Drainable-Blade Louver:

1. Louver Depth: 6 inches deep, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

2. Frame Thickness: As required to comply with structural performance requirements, but not less than 0.125 inch (3.18 mm).

3. Blade Thickness: 0.081 inch (2.06 mm)

4. Blade Angle and Spacing: 37 degrees and 6 inches (125mm) o.c. for 6-inch (150 mm) deep louvers.

C. Continuous, Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louvers: Fabricated with close-fitting, field-made splice joints in blades designed to permit expansion and contraction without deforming blades or framework and with mullions recessed from front edges of blades so blades have continuous appearance.

2.5 LOUVER SCREENS

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.

2. Screening Type: Bird screening.

B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches (150 mm) from each corner and at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.

C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.

1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips.

2. Finish: Mill finish, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert for securing screen mesh.

D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:

1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) square mesh, 0.063-inch (1.6-mm) wire.

2.6 BLANK-OFF PANELS

A. General: Fabricate blank-off panels from materials and to sizes required for fit and attachment to louvers.

1. Finish: Same as louvers.

2. Attachment: Attach panels to the back of louver frames with clips, or stainless-steel sheet-metal screws.

B. Uninsulated Blank-Off Panels: Nominal 0.050 thick metal sheet, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

C. Insulated, Blank-off Panels: Laminated metal-faced panels consisting of insulating core surfaced on back and front with metal sheets.

1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, not less than 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) nominal thickness.

3. Insulating Core: Unfaced mineral-fiber or rigid insulation board complying with ASTM C 612, Class 1 and 2, or extruded-polystyrene insulation board complying with ASTM C 578. Insulated blank-off panels shall achieve R-value as specified for wall in which louvers are located.

4. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with 1/8-by-l-inch (3.2-by-25-mm) PVC compression gaskets.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish louvers after assembly.

C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-MC10C21A41 Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.7 mils or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

1. Color and Gloss: Unless otherwise selected by Architect, match color and gloss of exterior wall panels in which louvers are installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.


A. Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units that comply with requirements.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning.

C. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

D. Protect louvers from damage during construction. Use temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove protective cover at the time of substantial completion.

E. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 11 41 20 WALK-IN COOLERS AND FREEZERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements sections apply to work of this section

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide walk-in site assembled coolers and freezers, as indicated on drawings, as specified and as required for proper completion of work, including accessories needed for proper installation and operation.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Refer to Division 9 Section “Tiling” for Quarry tile floor.

B. Refer to Section 23 for HVAC requirements.

C. Refer to Division 23 for refrigerant piping, pipe insulation and refrigerant.

D. Section 23 for direct-digital control system for HVAC.

E. Refer to Division 26, Electrical for lighting and power requirements.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Refrigeration Compressor Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace compressors that fail in materials or workmanship within five (5) years from the date of final acceptance by the Owner. Failure includes but is not limited to inability to maintain set temperature.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Walk-in units, including assembly and installation instructions.

2. Condensing units, with mounting rack where required.

3. Unit coolers.

4. Temperature controls and alarms.

5. Diagrams and details of piping, wiring and controls.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


6. Manufacturers identification signage for freezers, coolers and alarm systems.

B. Operational test reports.

C. Final field test reports.

D. Maintenance and operating manual.

E. Manufacturer’s compressor warranty.

1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):

1. 420-08 Unit Coolers for Refrigeration.

2. 520-04 Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units.

C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):

1. 15-10 Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems

D. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. A240/A240M-14 Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and For General Applications

2. E84-11 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

E. National Sanitation Foundation/American National Standard (NSF/ANSI):

1. 7-09 Commercial Refrigerators and Storage Freezers

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

2. 70-14 National Electric Code

G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. 207-08(R2014) . Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical

2. 471-10(R2014) . Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


3. 1598-03(R2012) Luminaires

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NSF Standards: Provide equipment that bears NSF Certification Mark certifying compliance with applicable standards.

B. UL Certification: Provide electric and fuel-burning equipment and components that are evaluated by UL for fire, electric shock, and casualty hazards according to applicable safety standards, and that are UL certified for compliance and labeled for intended use.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Install equipment to comply with the following:

1. ASHRAE 15, “Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.”

2. NFPA 70, “National Electric Code.”

2.2 WALK-IN COOLER AND FREEZER CONSTRUCTION

A. General: Prefabricated, sectional, all-metal clad, modular units, designed for easy accurate field assembly.

B. Provide walk-in units manufactured for food service use conforming to NSF/ANSI 7, UL 207, and UL 471. Floorless, with insulated floor screeds, installed over insulated floors. // // Floor panel walk-in refrigerators and freezers with appropriate insulated floor assembly // and // // polished aluminum // // galvanized skin // finish floor. Verify cooler and freezer floors.

C. Panel Construction:

1. General: Interchangeable, 1219 mm (48 inch) maximum width, 101 mm (4 inch) thick, filled with insulation. Double seal serrated neoprene rubber gaskets to assure air and vapor tight joints.

2. Corner panels: 90 degree angle, radiuses 15 mm (0.5 inch) inside and outside, with 305 mm (12-inch) dimensions each side.

3. Panel edges: Foam-in-place, tongue-and-grooved urethane to assure tight joints. Provide double seal serrated neoprene rubber gaskets to assure air and vapor tight joints on the interior and exterior of each panel along every tongue.

4. Insulation: 101 mm (4 inch) minimum foamed-in-place polyurethane with manufacturer’s rated “K” factor of not more than 0.15, free rise design of not less than 27 kg per cubic meter (1.7 pounds per cubic foot), or in-

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


place density of not less than 32 kg per cubic meter (2 pounds per cubic foot). Provide floor screeds with minimum of 63 mm (2-1/2 inches) of foamed insulation.

5. Door Panel and Door:

a. Provide channel thermal breaker type reinforcing steel frame around the entire perimeter of the door opening.

b. Door to be an infitting flush-mounted type with dual flexible blade wiper gasket on the bottom, and a replaceable magnetic gasket on the top edge and along both sides.

c. Provide heated, double glass view windows in refrigerator doors.

d. Door to be equipped with a minimum of three (3) hinges, for rough usage including aluminum diamond plate on inside of door panel and frame to a height of 915 mm (36 inches).

e. Provide hydraulic exterior door closer to prevent slamming and assure secure closing.

f. Door hinges and latch and strike assembly: Manufacturer's standard, self-closing cam-lift type hinges, for 1219 mm (48 inch) door, chrome plated or polished aluminum finish, made to provide for locking, but with an inside safety release mechanism to prevent anyone from being locked inside when door is locked from outside.

g. Concealed, energy use selective, anti-sweat heater wire circuit: Provide sufficient heat to prevent condensation and frost formation at the door jambs and exterior edges of the door on all sides.

h. Thermometer: Manufacturer's standard, 50 mm (2-inch) minimum diameter, dial type, flush mounted in door panel.

6. Pressure relief port: Provide for all freezers operating at 18 degree C (0 degree F), or lower, two-way type ports, to allow for an increase or decrease of air pressure on the interior of the freezer to equalize with air pressure on the exterior. Provide ports with automatically controlled, UL approved anti-sweat heaters. Complete device to carry UL Label and be assembled ready for connection. Install port in a wall panel away from the direct air stream flowing from the coils.

7. Floor Panels:

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


a. Floor Panel Strength: Capable of withstanding 28.7 kPa (600 pounds per square foot) uniform load.

b. Provide prefabricated floor panels of the same construction as wall/ceiling except with 1.9 mm (0.78 inch; 14 gauge) galvanized skin, sealed watertight. Provide nonskid floor strips 101 x 915 mm (4 x 36 inch) and field apply at 305 mm (12 inch) spacing in all aisles. Provide prefabricated floor panels which are laid on recessed with, sloping interior floor ramps at exterior entrance doors panels flush with surrounding building floor. Furnish two (2) sets of erection tools, compatible with fasteners, with each unit.

8. Floorless Refrigeration Floors:

a. Make floorless refrigerator floors flush with the surrounding building floor. Provide the built-in floor with two (2) // // three (3) // // four (4) // layers of // 50 mm (2 inch) // // mm ( inch) // thick polyurethane board insulation with staggered joints set in mastic.

9. Floor Finish: Non-slip quarry tile with cove base on grout flush with adjoining floor.//

D. Wherever compartment dimension exceed clear-span ability of ceiling panels, provide I-beam support on exterior of ceiling or spline-hangers. Install 13 mm (1/2 inch) diameter steel rods through beam/hangers and secure to structure above. Beams or posts within compartments are not acceptable.

E. Rub rail wall protectors: Manufacturer’s standard, at floor line of walls exposed to traffic.

F. Lights: Provide high-efficiency rated two-tube fluorescent lamps in vapor-proof fixtures with safety shields. Lighting must conform with UL 1598. Provide diffuser and ballast capable of operating in minus 23 degrees C (10 degrees F) temperature. Lights must run full length of walk-in starting 610 mm (24 inches) from front panel and extending within 610 mm (24 inches) of back panel. Run between shelf rows to obtain 323 lux (30 foot-candles) at floor level regardless of any interior furnishings.

2.3 CONDENSING UNITS

A. Comply with ARI Standard 520. Air cooled, water cooled or combination air/water cooled type as shown in construction documents.

B. Provide motor driven integral compressor, motor starter, condenser, receiver, common base, and safety/operational controls.

C. Receiver capacity not to be less than 125 percent of system refrigerant charge.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


D. For units racked above each other and for units installed in a closet, provide a factory fabricated steel rack extending approximately 1143 mm (45 inches) above the floor.

E. Provide two (2) condensing units and unit coolers with independent refrigeration systems for freezer when shown on construction documents or recommended by manufacturer due to size or freezer.

F. Do not locate compressors on top of refrigerators or freezers.

G. Provide positive oil lubrication and oil level indicating device for each compressor. Provide water regulating valve for water cooled unit.

H. Compressor Motor: Squirrel cage induction type of ample size for continuous operating at maximum compressor performance. Provide inherent protection, in compressor terminal box, for each phase of motor.

I. Pressure Switches: Automatic reset low pressure switch, and automatic or manual reset high pressure cutout.

J. Air Cooled Condensing Units:

1. High efficiency type piped and automatically controlled to operate at lower head pressures during low ambient temperature conditions. Designed and weather-proofed for outdoor installation, to operate satisfactorily at winter ambient temperatures down to 6 degrees C (10 degrees F), and be provided with crankcase and receiver heaters.

2. The condenser fans are to be driven by permanent split capacitor motors.

2.4 UNIT COOLERS

A. Comply with ARI Standard 420. Units to be UL listed, forced-ventilation type. Provide integral defrosting, internal or external refrigerant distributor, single or multiple fans and motors, drip-pan, deflectors, aluminum or baked-enamel steel housing, hangers, and all accessories. Unit coolers for kitchen walk-in units to be NSF approved.

B. Motors: Permanent split capacitor type in accordance with Section 11 05 12, GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT. Provide motors with thermal overload protection and manual starting switch.

C. Drain Pans: Galvanized sheet steel. Provide additional drain pans under uncovered refrigerant connections, and interconnect them with main drain pan. For freezer units provide electrically heated drain pan.

D. Defrost Provision:

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Refrigerators: Defrost to occur during compressor off cycle with evaporator fan running continuously.

2. Freezer defrost: Defrost by heating elements incorporated into coil and drain pan. Operation of evaporator fan to be delayed after defrost cycle until evaporator is cold enough to freeze any water droplets that are on evaporator coil. Defrosting unit to be automatically controlled by an electric clock, refrigerant suction gas pressure sensing device, or by means of sensing increased air resistance due to ice accumulation.

2.5 MONITORING ALARM SYSTEM

A. Provide an electronic monitoring and alarm system for each section of each unit.

1. System Components: Detecting thermostat, master control panel, interconnecting wiring, remote audible alarm, and defrost compensator. Provide dials showing temperatures and pilot lights, warning lights, switches, transformer, and buzzer, all as a part of the master control panel. Locate master control panel and remote audible alarm as indicated on construction documents. Provide power fuse to protect system components.

2. System Operation: Set alarms at 5 degrees C (10 degrees F) above and below specified operating temperatures.

B. Personnel Alarm: For each unit, provide separate audible alarm system operable from inside unit, for use of personnel unable to exit unit. Locate remote audible alarm where indicated on construction documents.

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Identify all walk-ins, refrigeration equipment and alarm devices.

2.7 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FREEZERS

A. Provide entrance to freezers through a refrigerator of a higher temperature. Locate thermometer serving frozen freezer outside of higher temperature refrigerator used as entrance vestibule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble walk-in units and install refrigeration equipment as described in the respective manufacturer's instructions. Make panel joints tight and seal all panel penetrations to prevent condensation or frosting.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Unit cooler: NSF approval requires that the unit be suspended at 90 mm (3-1/2 inches) minimum distance below the ceiling to allow cleaning the top of the unit cooler.

2. Mount pipe, conduit, and instrumentation on the exterior and pass thru neatly drilled penetrations to the lights or other devices.

B. Piping, Pipe Insulation and Refrigerant: Provide in accordance with Section 23 23 00, REFRIGERANT PIPING.

C. Install controls in accordance with Installation:

3.2 COOLER AND FREEZER START-UP, AND PERFORMANCE TESTS AND INSTRUCTIONS:

A. Initial Start-up and Operational Test:

1. Provide all lubricants and accessories before initial start-up. Start and operate all equipment.

2. Follow the manufacturer’s procedures and place the systems under all modes of operation.

3. Supplement initial charges of lubricating oil to assure maximum operating capacity.

4. Adjust all safety and automatic control instruments. Record manufacturer’s recommended readings hourly.

5. Operational tests must cover a period of not less than three (3) days. Submit operational test report.

B. Test Reports: Submit the final field test reports for each system tested, describing test apparatus, instrumentation calculations, and equipment data based on industry standard forms. Include in data:

1. Compressor and air moving device ampere readings.

2. Power supply characteristics, including phase imbalance, with 1/2 percent accuracy.

3. Thermostatic expansion valve superheat-value as determined by field test.

4. Sub-cooling.

5. High and low refrigerant temperature switch set-points.

6. Monitoring alarm system.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


7. Low oil pressure switch set-point.

8. Defrost system timer and thermostat set-points.

9. Moisture content.

10. Ambient, condensing and coolant temperatures.

11. Capacity control set-points.

12. Field data and adjustments which affect unit performance and energy consumption.

13. Where final adjustments and settings cannot be permanently marked or drilled and pinned as an integral part of device, include adjustment and setting data in test report.

C. Make arrangements with owner for training of maintenance staff. Use the start-up and test period for required operation and maintenance instructions to MSCAA personnel.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 11 42 00 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide food service equipment complete, including all components required for proper operation and installation, indicated on Drawings as specified and as required for proper completion of the Work.


1. Refer to Plumbing Drawings for supply and exhaust fans; exhaust ductwork; service roughing-ins; drain traps; vents; valves, pipes, and fittings; and other materials required to complete food service equipment installation.

2. Refer to Electrical Drawings for connections to wiring, disconnects, and other electrical materials required to complete food service equipment installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of food service equipment indicated. Include manufacturer's model number and accessories and requirements for access and maintenance clearances, water and drainage, power or fuel, and service-connections including roughing-in dimensions.

B. Shop Drawings: For food service equipment not manufactured as standard production and catalog items by manufacturers. Include plans, elevations, sections, roughing-in dimensions, fabrication details, service requirements, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Details of wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

2. Piping Diagrams: Details of piping systems and differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed piping.

C. Maintenance Data: Operation, maintenance, and parts data for food service equipment to include in the maintenance manuals, including a product schedule:


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing food service equipment, who has completed installations

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


similar in design and extent to that indicated for this Project, and who has a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of food service equipment through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings and specifications indicate food service equipment based on the specific products indicated. Other manufacturers' equipment with equal size and performance characteristics will be considered.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) codes:

1. NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."

2. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."

E. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment or components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

F. AGA Certification: Provide gas-burning appliances certified by the American Gas Association (AGA).

G. ASHRAE Compliance: Provide mechanical refrigeration systems complying with the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers' ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

H. NSF Standards: Comply with applicable NSF International (NSF) standards and criteria and provide NSF Certification Mark on each equipment item, unless otherwise indicated.

I. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSI standards for electric-powered and gas-burning appliances; for piping and for plumbing fittings, including vacuum breakers and air gaps, to prevent siphonage in water piping.

J. SMACNA Standard: Where applicable, fabricate food service equipment to comply with the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association's (SMACNA) "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," unless otherwise indicated.


A. Deliver food service equipment as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


B. Store food service equipment in original protective crating and covering and in a dry location.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of food service equipment installation areas by field measurements before equipment fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate equipment layout and installation with other work, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment and plumbing.

B. Coordinate location and requirements of service-utility connections.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Refrigeration Compressor Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace compressors that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Breakage.

2. Faulty operation.

C. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS

A. Products listed are Basis-of-Design. Equivalent products of other manufacturers are acceptable, subject to compliance with specified requirements.

B. Equipment Schedule: See the following page.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

Manufacturer /Distributor

Equipment

Hoshizaki Commercial Refrigerator Model CR1-FSCL, 22.8 cu. ft. storage capacity

Hoshizaki Commercial Freezer Model CF1S-FSL, 22.8 cu. ft. storage capacity

Blodgett Gas Convection Oven, Model SH0-100-G full size convection oven, with 6” seismic legs, 48” gas hose and quick disconnect and restraining device.

Pitco Gas Fryer, Model 65C with adjustable front and rear locking casters, tank cover and triple baskets.

Hoshizaki Ice Machine, Model KML-451M_H, low profile, modular cresent cuber, B-500, air cooled with the capacity to produce 429 lbs. of ice in 24 hours.

Hoshizaki Ice Storage Bin, Model B-300 SF with stainless steel interior.

Metro Metal Shelving, Super Erecta-Shelf Convience Shlf Packing, with Chrome finish.

Menumaster Model MCS10TS, medium volume commercial microwave. 1.2 cu.ft. capacity with stainless steel interior and exterior. 1000 watts power.

Southbend Range: S-Series, Model S36D restaurant range with standard oven and aluminized cabinet base, with casters.

Hoshizaki Water Filter, Model H-9320 Filter, Single configuration.

BK Resources Work Tables – Flat: VTT Series with T-430, 18 gage stainless steel tops and galvanized legs and undershelf and adjustable corrosion-resistant feet. Sizes as indicated on Drawings.

BK Resources Work Tables – Flat: SVT Series with T-430, 18 gage stainless steel tops, legs and bullet feet. Sizes as indicated on Drawings.


A. Fabricate food service equipment according to applicable NSF requirements. Factory assemble equipment to greatest extent possible.

B. Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Use methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. Provide ductile welds free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, or cracks.

C. Where stainless steel is joined to a dissimilar metal, use stainless-steel welding material or fastening devices.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


D. Form metal with break bends that are not flaky, scaly, or cracked in appearance; where breaks mar uniform surface appearance of material, remove marks by grinding, polishing, and finishing.

E. Sheared Metal Edges: Finish free of burrs, fins, and irregular projections.

F. Provide surfaces in food zone, as defined in NSF 2, free from exposed fasteners.

G. Provide pipe slots on equipment with turned-up edges and sized to accommodate service and utility lines and mechanical connections.

H. Provide enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts, to conceal service lines, operating components, and mechanical and electrical devices including those inside cabinets, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

1. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish.

2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, service-utility connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of food service equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping, mechanical, and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation.


A. Install food service equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, original design, and referenced standards.

B. Complete equipment field assembly, where required, using methods indicated on approved shop drawings.

1. Provide closed butt and contact joints that do not require a filler.

2. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match adjacent finish.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Install equipment with access and maintenance clearances according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Provide cutouts in equipment, neatly formed, where required to run service lines through equipment to make final connections.

E. Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing, unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints.

3.3 PROTECTING

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner that ensures food service equipment is without damage or deterioration at the time of project Completion.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. Startup Services: Perform startup services, demonstrate equipment and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below.

1. Coordinate food service equipment startup with service-utility testing, balancing, and adjustments.

2. Remove protective coverings and clean and sanitize equipment, both inside and out, and relamp equipment with integral lighting. Where applicable, comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.

3. Test each equipment item for proper operation. Repair or replace equipment that is defective in operation, including units that operate below required capacity or that operate with excessive noise or vibration.

4. Test refrigeration equipment's ability to maintain specified operating temperature. . Repair or replace equipment that does not maintain specified operating temperature.

5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

6. Test motors and rotating equipment for proper rotation and lubricate moving parts according to manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Test water, drain, gas, refrigerant, and liquid-carrying components for leaks. Repair or replace leaking components.

8. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance for each food service equipment item.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


9. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals.

10. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.


.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 12 48 13 ENTRANCE GRILLE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Conditions and Division 01 Specifications sections apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide recessed entrance mats at as indicated, as specified and as required for proper completion of work.

B. Related Work: Recess in slab for built in mat. Refer to Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete”.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product data.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing cross section of installed mats, and transitions at entrance doors.

C. Samples: Provide color samples of tread rail inserts for Architect’s color selection

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL

A. Provide new entrance mats in recessed entrance frames, complete including accessories required for proper installation. Where indicated provide surface mounted mats.

2.2 MATS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of Construction Specialties, Inc. distributed by Hillyer Sales 901-452-8672, Memphis, TN; or equivalent products of the following:

1. Balco, Inc.

2. Reese Enterprises

3. Babcock-Davis

B. Products: Provide products similar and equal to Construction Specialties Pedisystems line matching existing entrance mat.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


1. Recessed Entrance Mat: Peditred G-4, provide in frame depth indicated on Drawings, with carpet rail fill in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

2. Rail Material Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

3. Tread Inserts: Abrasive tread inserts in color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

4. Mat Size: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with manufacturer's standard protective coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for substrate preparation and mat installation. Coordinate tops of mat surfaces with bottoms of doors.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Prior to installation of mat, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses. Maintain protection until entrance mats are installed and the Project is near Substantial Completion.


01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


SECTION 13 34 19 PRE-ENGINEERED METAL CANOPY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Division 0, General Provisions and Division 1 apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide pre-engineered metal canopy system including, structural steel members, decking, prefinished roof panels, fascia panels, gutters, flashing and trim, and appurtenances as indicated on Drawings as specified and as required to make a complete canopy assembly.


A. See Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications”.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings to the Architect prior to fabrication. Include dimensions, connections with adjoining materials, construction, and accessory details.

B. Submit templates and placement drawings as required for satisfactory placing, connection, and anchorage.

C. Samples: For verification of finishes, textures, and colors.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Beyond the correction period stated in the Contract for Construction the Erector shall warrant pre-engineered metal canopy system, including roof and fascia panels, defective parts, structural failures, finishes, with the following provisions:

1. Provide a 25-year No Dollar Limit, Unlimited Penal Sum Warranty that includes replacement materials and installation labor, from Date of Substantial Completion.

2. Excluded from Warranty are components not supplied or installed by Metal Canopy Supplier / Erector.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fabrication and erection schedules as required to avoid delays and ensure that items built into concrete are available at the time of the concrete placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


2.1 EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPCSP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning".

B. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Apply two coats of white-colored shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.

2. Primer Color: White or light-gray.

2.2 ROOF PANELS AND ROOF DECKING

A. Panels Forming Ceiling/Soffit of Canopy: 16” wide galvanized steel panels with 3” interlocking seams. Indicate panel gauge on shop drawings.

B. Roof Decking: Provide metal galvanized metal decking.

1. Sheet steel for primer painted roof deck and accessories: ASTM A611, Grade C, yield strength 33,000 psi.

2. Sheet steel for galvanized roof deck and accessories: ASTM A653-94, Structural Quality, minimum yield strength of 33 ksi. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A924-94 with a minimum coating class of G60 as defined by A653-94.

3. Galvanizing repair paint: Zinc-rich repair paint.

4. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A36.

5. Provide manufacturer’s standard clips for attaching electrical conduit to decking.

2.3 FLUSH-PROFILE METAL FASCIA PANEL

A. Factory-formed, sheet metal fascia panels; with flush butt joint between panels, returns at top and bottom of panels, and mechanically attaching through panel to supports. Include accessories and hardware required for weathertight installation.

1. Fabricate from aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50 or 80; with Class AZ55 coating designation. State metal gauges on Shop Drawings.

2. Panel Overall Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Finishes:

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


a. Exposed Surface: Baked-on powder-coated, smooth-surface, in color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

b. Concealed Surface: Manufacturer's standard white or light-colored, smooth surface finish.

2.4 GUTTERS

A. Provide 16 gauge metal gutters, roll-formed and shaped for continuous, water-tight drainage, fabricate and install gutters in accordance with SMACNA.

B. Coordinate rain leader locations and size requirements with Architect.

C. Fabricate gutters with movement joints.

2.5 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM:

A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing systems at locations where appropriate and necessary for a complete and weather-tight canopy system.

1. Material: Same as material used for fascia or roof panel, in color matching adjacent surfaces.

B. Roof Penetration Flashing and Tie Downs: Provide manufactured, flexible pipe and vent flashing units at roof penetrations for conduits. Use flashing units with flexible bases that will conform to roof panel configurations.

1. Roof Penetration Flashing: Use pipe flashings approved by building fabricator.

2.6 FOOTINGS

A. Coordinate erection schedule in order to allow adequate time for fabrication and erection, including items that are built into concrete.

B. Coordinate and verify the exact concrete footing sizes, requirements, and locations.

C. Provide anchor bolts and templates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Prepare the jobsite to receive the pre-engineered metal canopy system, including but not limited to the following:

B. Set all anchor bolts level. Ensure all anchor bolts are set and leveling nuts are in place at the proper elevation prior to the metal canopy system arrival on site. After the columns are set, properly adjust leveling nuts and apply non-shrink grout.

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


C. Coordinate as required to provide space around canopy slab for equipment required to set the canopy in place.

D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

E. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.

3.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

A. Erect structural steel framing in accordance with requirements of regulatory agencies.

B. Shore and brace framing until permanent connections are made and members are securely anchored into structure.

C. All exterior fastenings and connections shall be corrosion resistant.

D. Comply with AISC requirements for welded, riveted or bolted connections.

E. Welding: Comply with current AWS requirements and ICBO/UBC Standard 27-7. Grind exposed welds smooth.

F. Holes: Punched or drilled. Cutting torch not permitted.

G. Set accurately to the lines and grades indicated with the permanent connections made only after the members have been plumbed and checked for line and level.

H. Structural steel must be within normal tolerances for shapes to permit the erection of abutting materials.

I. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing as required to support the roof.

3.3 METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Rigidly fasten end of metal roof panels allowing for movement due to thermal expansion and contraction.

B. Flush-Profile Metal Fascia Panels:

1. Attach metal fascia panels to supports at each panel joint using fasteners spaced not more than manufacturer's recommendation.

3.4 GUTTERS, FLASHING, TRIM AND OTHER ACCESSORIES

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


A. Install gutters, flashing, trim, and other accessories as necessary for a complete and water-tight installation.

B. Install sealants where necessary for a complete and weathertight installation.

END OF SECTION

01/10/18 MSCAA 14-1386-02


THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

SPECIFICATIONS FOR AIRFIELD MAINTENANCE … MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS SUPPORT FACILITY MEMPHIS...

Documents

Transcript of SPECIFICATIONS FOR AIRFIELD MAINTENANCE … MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS SUPPORT FACILITY MEMPHIS...